浙江地区英语学科高三unit 16(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
【简介】感谢网友“天地情侣”参与投稿，下面是小编为大家推荐的浙江地区英语学科高三unit 16(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)（共15篇），欢迎阅读，希望大家能够喜欢。
篇1：浙江地区英语学科高三unit 16(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Brief introduction of this unit.
This unit mainly deals with two lessons, a part--time job and three letters. In lesson 61, the author tells us how useful and valuable it is to take a part-time job. In lesson 62.The author shows us the trouble and two different ways to solve the problem. What should you do when you face this? The students can express their own opinion and learn some useful words and phrases. Lesson 63 deals with Grammar, the passive voice. Students can improve their listening and speaking and writing in lesson 64. In this unit, the students should learn how to make apologies and regrets and write a reply to a letter. So this unit gives good advice on students’ social and personal life.
The first period ---------lesson 61
Teaching aims:
1. learn and master: affect, show sb around ,have a gift for, so long as
2. make the student understand the text better
Teaching important points:
1. Verb: affect, value ;phrases: have a gift for, so long as, show sb around , work on.
2. Train the students reading ability.
Teaching difficult points:
Understand the text correctly to answer the second question in part 2 on page 92
Teaching methods:
1. Fast reading to make the students get a general idea to answer the two questions on the top of the text.
2 Careful reading to make the students answer the detailed questions
3 Discussion to answer the difficult questions
Teaching aids:
A computer, a tape recorder, the blackboard
Teaching procedures:
Step l lead in
1. Show the students some pictures on screen and show them some jobs (clerk /cook/ painter/ cleaner…..collect some words about the part-time job)
2. Ask the students: what is my job? (Teacher is my full time job?). What is your full-time job? (Student are our full time job).Do you have some part--time job?
3. Why do you think some people take part-time job?(make some money to buy what they need/increase the income to support their family/get more experience for the future….)
Step 2 fast reading
1. What part-time job is mentioned as an example? ( A guide service to tourists)
Step 3 careful reading
1 Text structure: divide the text into two parts:
Part one :( Paragraph 1-2) Fred Pearson’s part-time job as a tourist service
Part two :( Paragraph 3----5) Reasons for taking a part-time job
2. And some questions about the text
(1). What is the passage mainly about? (It proves that taking part-time jobs is really helpful.)
(2).Why was offering guide services to tourists suitable for Fred ?
(3).what’s meant by the phrase “a part-time job leading to greater things”.( A part-time job which results in a full-time job, or interesting developments.)
(4).which of these adjectives will you use to describe Fred? Why?
(Serious, hard-working, fun-loving, lazy, crazy, organized, easy-going, clever, energetic, educated)
(5)what is “good preparation for the world outside schools and universities.” In what ways?
(5).what’s the author’s attitude about the passage? ( Agree to get part-time job)
(6)What is the writer’s opinion about work?(interesting and enjoyable)
3. Read the passage carefully the finish the note-making
Reasons for taking a part-time job You don’t have to ask your parents for money
You can buy whatever you want
It’s a good preparation for the world
You learn the value of money
You will get some work experience
Employers prefer to employ someone with work experience
You have a greater chance of finding a suitable job
Step 4 language points
Read with the tape then deal with the language points by asking some questions:
1. What did Fred decide to do when he got on well with the tourist?( show sb around….)
2. After spending happy time with the tourist, what did Fred discover?( have a gift for….)
3. On what condition can we take a part-time job?( so long as; affect)
4. Why might employers prefer to hire someone with work experience?( value..)
5. when might a newspaper employ you according to the passage?( work on)
step 5 discussion
1. Do you think that college students should take part-time jobs? Why?
(a. affect their studies ;change their life views
(b.-- increase their knowledge
-- develop their skills
--gain social experience
-- prepare for their future
-- make their life enjoyable/interesting
2. If you want to find a part-time job, how and where can you find it?
Step 6 Further information
1. How to write the application form
Name: Wang Da-rong
Address: 148 Chengdu Road, Tianjin 300051, China
Employment Record: 1980 to present, Library of Tianjian
PERSONAL DATA
Date of birth: Oct.12, 1958
Sex: male
Marriage: single
Health: Excellent
skill: Typing
Hobbies: Volleyball ,Swimming
Education: 1976,graduated from 21st Middle School, Tianjin 1980,graduated from Nankai University,Library Science Department, majoring in library science,
2.How to interview others: How to Get the Job You Want
INTERVIEWS
Usually the first time an employer sees you is at the job interview. What can you do to look and sound right for the job?
First you need to .look your best. Make sure your hair and your clothes are clean and neat.
Next arrive at the job interview five or ten minutes early so an employer knows you can be on time. It’s a good idea to bring your Social Security card with you. And bring a pen, so you can write an application and answer questions clearly. Tell the employer what experience you now have. If you don’t have experience, tell the employer that you want to learn. You can ask the employer polite questions about the job, too. Don’t chew gum, smoke, or drink coffee during the interview.
Always thank the employer for the interview. And remember even if you don’t get the job, you are getting good practice for your next interview. If you know how to interview, you can get the job you want!
Step 7 homework
Write a short passage about your experience as a guide or some other part-time job .you should include:
1. when and where and why you did the job
2. your opinion about the things you did
3. your plan for you future
Step 8 summary
Today we’ve learned a passage about part-time jobs. We have known how the part-time jobs came up and also known the advantages of taking them.
The second period ------------lesson 62
Teaching aims:
1. Learn and master: in a difficult position, from time to time, report ……to, hear one’s advice…
2. Sentence patterns
(1) should have done (2)There is no need to do sth
(3)There is no doubt about (4) It’s one’s duty to do sth
3. Make the student to understand the letters better and learn to ask for advice and give advice
Teaching important points:
1. Phrases: in a difficult position , from time to time, report ..to.., hear one’s advice..
2. (1) should have done (2) there is no need to do sth
(3) there is no doubt about (4) It’s one’s duty to do sth
Teaching difficult points:
Master the present perfect continuous tense
Teaching methods:
1.Fast reading to make the students to get a general idea
2 Careful reading to make the students answer the detailed questions
3 Discussion to answer the difficult questions and make every student work in class
Teaching aids:
A computer, a tape recorder, the blackboard
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Revise lesson 61 by asking: what are the reasons for taking a part-time job?
Step 2 lead in
1. Taking a part-time job is very necessary. But sometimes you will meet some trouble? In this situation , what would you do?
2. In our daily life and our study, we often have trouble. What should you do when you have trouble?( Have a heart-to-heart talk with classmates or friends/Write letters to friends./Make phone calls to friends./ Chat with your friends online/ Send short messages by mobile phone.)
3. Right! I know you have different ways to solve the problem. Today we’ll read a letter from John, and two letters from Marty to John,. John has a problem at work and asks Marty for some advice.
Step 3 fast reading
Read fast then answer:
1. What problem does John have at work ?
(He has noticed that one of his workmates is stealing things from the workplace. The manager has found out that someone is stealing things.)
3. what advice does Marty give?
In the second letter, Marty suggests that he not say anything to the manager or to the thief but warns him to check his bag before leaving work every evening.
In the third letter, Marty advises him to report this worker to the manager
Step 4 careful reading
Read the passage again then get more detailed information (DCDDBD)
1. From Marty’s first letter we know he is________
A selfish B brave C brave and willing to fight for truth
D understanding , clever and careful
2. From Marty’s second letter we know he is ______
A selfish B brave but careless
C brave and willing to fight for truth
D understanding , clever and careful
3. The two friends are writing to ______
A tell each other stories B give each other information
C persuade each other to change mind
D ask for and give advice
4. From John’s letter we can tell that ____
A he relies B he isn’t brave or independent enough
C he doesn’t know how to solve the problem
D all of the above
5 If someone says “I’m afraid that….” he/she is ____
A frightened B polite C worried D unhealthy
6” I think I’m in a difficult position .”The underlined word has the same meaning as the one in “_______”
A Can you show me the position of the school on the map
B He is lying in a very uncomfortable position
C Tom was elected General Secretary, and held this position until he was retired.
D.Madama Michel found herself in an embarrassing position when her secret was out
Step 5 language points
Deal with the language points by asking the students some questions
1. Where has John been working for about two months.?( have been doing)
2. How does one of his workmates steal meat in the factory? ( From time to time, he put………)
3. In John’s opinion, what should he have done?( should have dong…)
3. In the second letter, what’s one of Marty’s advice to John? (There is no need to do …….
4. why does Marty advise John to report the other worker to the manager?
(report…to….; There is no doubt about sth.. ;It is the duty of everyone to do sth)
Step 6 practice Part 4 on page 94
Today, Marty write another letter to John. Now fill in the blanks with the modal verbs. ( will, would, can, could, must,should,may,might)
Step 7 Discussion
1. After receiving Marty’s letters and advice, what would you do if you were John?
2. Beside Marty’s advice, what else would you give to John?
3. Do you think it necessary to tell lies?
Step 7 summary
In this lesson we’ve read three letters and learnt some phrases and sentence patterns .Also we’ve known how to ask for advice and how to give some advice. After class, you must read and remember the phrases and sentence patterns.
Step 8 homework
Write a letter to help your friend solve the problem.
My name is Liu Mei. I’m a girl student. I’m tall and beautiful, I think. I want to be an airstewardess(空姐) after leaving school. I think it is the best job for me, because it is a fashionable (时髦的) job for girls nowadays. But my father insists that a job on a plane is not quite safe. He wants me to be an artist. What can I do? I need your help. Please write to me. Thank you.
The third period ------------lesson 63
Teaching aims:
Revise the forms and usages of the Passive voice and make the students master the way of changing the sentences of the active voice into the passive voice.
Teaching important points:
Master the forms of the passive voice in all tenses and make the students master the way of changing the verb into the passive voice
Teaching difficult points:
1. Master the forms of the perfect passive voice and the continuous passive voice.
2. Make the students master the verb forms when some collective nouns are used as subjects.
Teaching methods:
1. Do some exercises to review the forms of the passive voice
2. Do some exercises to consolidate the ways of changing the passive voice into the active voice
Teaching aids:
A computer, a tape recorder, the blackboard
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 revision and lead in
Revise lesson 62 by asking:
1. what advice did Marty give to John?
2. what will you do if you find someone stealing/selling drugs?
(I will report the man to the police//The man will be reported to the police)
(We should tell him not to steal// The man should be told not to steal)
3. The above two sentences are the passive voice .Today we will learn the passive voice.
Step 2 grammar study
1. Today we’ll learn lesson 63. First look at Part 1.Look at the seven sentences ,pay attention to the form the passive voice in bold type. You’d better translate them into Chinese.
2. Conclusion of the passive voice 被动语态的时态、人称和数的变化主要体现在be的变化上，其形式与系动词be的变化形式完全一样。以give为例，列表如下：
一般现在时 is given
一般过去时 Was given
现在进行时 Is being given
过去进行时 Was being given
一般将来时 Will be given/is(am/are) going to be given
过去将来时 Would be given/was/were going to be given
现在完成时 Have/has been done
过去完成时 Had been done
Step 3 practice
Now let’s do part 2 on page 95.change the sentences into the passive voices. First find out the object then change. The verb form must agree with the subject in number. Pay attention to the first and the third sentence.
1. My whole family have been invited to supper on Saturday .
2. Neither of the children is/are told about the accident.
Step 4 Special points/misunderstanding about the passive voice
1. 正:The food tastes delicious. 误：The food is tasted delicious.
2. 正: She had her hand burned. 误：Her hand was had burned.
3. 正: The fire broken out in the capital building.
误：The fire was broken out in the capital building.
3. 正: I taught myself English. 误：Myself was taught English
Step 5 further practice
1. Now look at part 3. first read the passage then underline the predicate verbs then change the passage into the passive voice.
2. some exercises to consolidate the passive voice(ACDDDB)
(1.(全国) Sara, hurry up. I'm afraid you can’t have time to ______ before the party.
A. get changed B. get change C. get changing D. get to change
(2．（2004北京）The mayor of Beijing says that all construction work for the Beijing Olympics _____ by .
A. has been completed B. has completed
C. will have been completed D.will have completed
(3．（2004全国03）- The window is dirty.
- I know. It _____ for weeks.
A. hasn’t cleaned B. didn’t clean C. wasn’t cleaned D .hasn’t been cleaned
(4(上海春季, By the end of last year, another new gymnasium _______ in Beijing.
A.would be completed B.was being completed
C.has been completed D.had been completed
5.(2003上海春季When and where to go for the on-salary holiday _______ yet.
A.are not decided B.have not been decided
C.is not being decided D.has not been decided
6.(NMET 2003北京春季, 27) -How long _______ at this job?
-Since 1990.
A.were you employed B.have you been employed
C.had you been employed D.will you be employed
Step 6 workbook and home work
1. Finish then page207
2. Exercise 3 .translation in the passive voice. This is our homework.
Step 7 summary
In this class we’ve reviewed the passive voice and done some exercises to consolidate the ways of changing the active voice into the passive voice.
The fourth period ------------lesson 64
Teaching aims:
1. learn and master everyday English:
apologies and regrets I’m sorry…./I apologize…../please excuse me…../I shouldn’t….
responses: That’s nothing./Never mind./It’s not important./It doesn’t matter./That’s all right./OK.
2. Do some listening and writing
3. Revise the passive voice and the useful expressions.
Teaching important and difficult points:
1. Make the students learn to make apologies and reply to apology
2. Improve the student’s listening and writing ability
Teaching aids:
A computer, a tape recorder, the blackboard
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revise the passive voice
In the last lesson, we reviewed the passive voice .Now do some exercise to consolidate it.
1. It’s a big factory. Five hundred people_________(employ) there.
2. You ________(invite)to the wedding. Why didn’t you go?
3. If rubber____(burn), it gives off a terrible smell.
4. The price of the tickets is too high, so they___(sell) badly.
5. The library and four other buildings____(damage) by a storm.
6. Take your time. You ____(give) some time to decided.
7. The book____(lie) under the chair for two days.
Step 2 Revise the useful expression in this unit
In this unit, we have learned some useful expression .Now do some exercise to consolidate them.
Show…around, have a gift for , so long as, work out, in a difficult situation, have no effect on , in one direction
1. Tom went off____ and Jack in another.
2. He is always ready to help anyone who is_____.
3. The headmaster____ many visitors____ our school yesterday.
4. She____ language .
5. ____you try, you will succeed.
6. He____ the problem with no difficulty.
7. The medicine_____ him .
Step3 listening
1. In your study and life, have you ever met some surprising things? Can you tell us one of your experiences?
2. But today we’ll listen to a surprising story which happened to someone at work---------A family likeness ( a case where one member of a family looks exactly like anther member the same family)
3. Go through the questions, listen for several times then check the answers.
Step 4 speaking
1. If you did something wrong, what should you say? If someone made an apology to you, what would you say? Now let’s look at the apologies and regrets on page 96
2. Make some dialogues according to the following situation. Teacher should give students an example.
Step 5 writing.
First remind the students the format of a letter. Then ask them to answer a letter to their friends. Do it as written work.
Step6 revise the grammar by doing some mutable choices(AACACC)
.1.( 2003北京春季,-What happened to the priceless works of art? -_______.
A.They were destroyed in the earthquake B.The earthquake was destroying them
C.They destroyed in the earthquake D.The earthquake destroyed them
2.( 上海, I feel it is your husband who _______ for the spoiled child.
A.is to blame B.is going to blame C.is to be blamed D.should blame
3.(NMET 2002 北京春季, This is Ted’s photo.We miss him a lot.He _______ trying to save a child in the earthquake.
A.killed B.is killed C.was killed D.was killing
4.(NMET 2002 北京春季,- How are the team playing?
- They’re playing well, but one of them _______ hurt.
A.got B.gets C.are D.were
5(2002 上海春季, Rainforests_______and burned at such a speed that they will disappear from the earth in the near future.
A.cut B.are cut C.are being cut D.had been cut
6(2002 上海春季 It____ long before we_____ the result of the experiment.
A.will not be, will know B.is, will knowC.will not be, knowD is, know
篇2：Teaching plan for Unit16(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元的教学，学生应能熟练地运用表示“道歉”的常用语；复习动词被动语态；了解西方国兼职工作的由来和向他人寻求心理咨询的必要性。
Importance and difficulty:
Words: gift, value, doubt, so long as, solve
Sentences:
1. There is no doubt about the correct thing to do.
2. It is the duty of everyone in a work unit to report another worker to the manager if he / she does anything wrong, or tell lies.
3. I’m afraid it is quite common that people steal things from their wok place.
4. There is no need to say anything to the other worker.
Grammar:
1. The rooms are being painted now.
2. A new hotel will be built in one month.
3. All the means have been tried, but it is still no use.
4. Supper had been prepared before they came back.
Useful expressions:
1. I’m sorry….
2. I’m afraid……
3. I apologize……
4. Never mind.
5. That’s all right./ OK.
6. Don’t worry.
Lesson 61
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ four skills : reading , listening, speaking and writing ability.
Importance and difficulty :
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aids: a tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading and understanding
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
T: What kind of work would you like to do when you leave school / college / university?
Now you are Senior 3 middle school students , half a year later , most of you will go to universities or colleges.
What are you going to do if you are a university / college student?
Ss: Study hard. ( Studying is your full-time job.)
Find a part-time job.
T: What kind of part-time jobs are you going to look for/ be after?
Ss: ……
T: If you are studying in a Teachers’ college, then you’d better do the home-teaching for middle school students.
If you are studying in a tourist university , you’d better find a part-time job in a tourist agency ---- to do the guide service to tourists / to show the visitors around.
There are different jobs for you to do in the society. Let’s come to the text and the example is a true story about an Englishman, Fred Pearson, who started the tourist service “Take-a-Guide” in London after leaving Oxford University.
Step 2. Pre-reading questions
Ffind the answers to the questions:
1. What part-time job is mentioned as an example?
A guide service to tourists.
2. Find one reason for taking a part-time job.
Any of the reasons listed below in part 3.
Step 3. Careful reading
Read it carefully and do the comprehension exercises: (Unit 16 --- 3B)
I. Main facts:
Tick some good reasons for taking part-time jobs mentioned in the passage.
□ You can be financially (在经济上) independent from your parents.
□ It is good preparation for the outside world.
□ You can learn the value of the money.
□ It greatly helps you with your studies.
□ You learn to work with others in a team.
□ It can surely earn enough money to start your own business after graduation.
□ You have a greater chance of finding a suitable job.
II. Do the note-making .
Find out the reasons for taking a part-time job by completing the following.
1. If you earn money, you will not ____________.
2. If you have money, you can buy ____________.
3. It is good preparation __________.
4. We should learn the value of money and _____________.
5. It is good to learn to work _____________.
6. You will get some _____________.
7. Employers prefer _______________.
8. You will have a greater chance ____________.
III. Further comprehension CBCDCC
1. What’s the passage about?
A. It gives some tips about how to find a suitable part-time job.
B. It tells about how Fred began his part-time job.
C. It proves that taking part-time jobs is really helpful.
D. It’s mainly about the advantages and disadvantages of working part-time.
2. Fred Pearson was going to ___ when a tourist stopped him and asked for directions.
A. attend classes
B. listen to a lecture
C. deliver a lecture
D. visit the university town of Oxford
3. ___ main good reasons for taking part-time jobs are mentioned in the passage.
A. Five B. Four C. three D. Two
4. Fred decided to show the tourist around the university town because ____.
A. he was very kind and ready to help others in trouble
B. he wanted to make money by doing it
C. he did not want to listen to the boring lecture
D. he found it enjoyable walking and talking with the tourist
5. Taking part-time jobs is helpful, and it can help students ___.
A. make a fortune
B. be dependent on their parents
C. prepare themselves for the future
D. get nothing but some work experience
6. What is the writer’s opinion about work?
A. It is boring and unpleasant.
B. It is not enjoyable, but necessary.
C. It is interesting and enjoyable.
Step 3. True or False statements: TFFTT FTTTT
1. Fred Pearson was a student of Oxford University.
2. After the lecture, Fred showed the tourist around the university.
3. Fred spent the whole day with the tourist.
4. Fred earned ten pounds for showing the tourist around.
5. Fred found a good way of making money.
6. When he graduated from the university, Fred started his won business as guide.
7. It is good for a student to begin a part-time job so long as it does not affect your studies.
8. Taking a part-time job has another advantage for learning to work with others in a team.
9. Companies usually prefers to employ experienced workers.
10. If you have done some part-time jobs while studying in the university, it’s easier for you to find a suitable job.
Step 4. Workbook Page 85
Step 5. Listening
Listen and language points
Step 6. Discussion: 3B --- Unit 16
1. Do you think that college students should take part-time jobs? Why / Why not?
2. Make a list of as many different part-time jobs as you can . At the end discuss which job you would like to do most and which job you would hate to do.
3. What do you think of Fred?
Which of these adjectives will you use to describe Fred ? Why?
serious hard-working fun-loving
lazy crazy organized
easy-going clever energetic
educated
hard-working------in the morning he worked and in the evenings he studied.
fun-loving------they spent a very enjoyable morning together.
organized------he worked and studied at the same time.
easy-going ------they got on well.
energetic------he worked and studied at the same time; he earned enough money to start his own business.
educated------he passed his exams.
Step 7 . Homework
Text book and paper exercises:
1. He found out that he had a gift for making a visit interesting and lively. In other words, he was by nature a good guide.
2. Hard-working------in the morning he worked and in the evenings he studied.
fun-loving------they spent a very enjoyable morning together.
Organized------he worked and studied at the same time.
Easy-going ------they got on well.
Energetic------he worked and studied at the same time; he earned enough money to start his own business.
Educated------he passed his exams.
3. A part-time job which results in a full-time job, or interesting developments.
4. A part-time job; you learn the value of money; you learn to work with others in a team.
5. They value someone who leads and active life and is anxious to learn.
6. To be independent.
7. C
Step 6. Rearrange the following events
a. At lunchtime, the tourist thanked him and gave him ten pounds, which was a lot of money in those days.
b. He passed his exams, and even better, when he left university he had warned enough money to start his own business. Offering guide services to tourists.
c. They got on so well that Fred decided not to go to the lecture but to show the tourist around the university instead.
d. Fred realized that he had discovered an interesting and enjoyable way of making money.
e. They spent a full and very enjoyable morning together, and Fred discovered that he had a gift for making a visit interesting and lively.
f. Fred Pearson was walking through the university town of Oxford one morning in 1961.
g. In the evenings, he studied hard for his exams, and most mornings he took tourists around Oxford.
h. He was on his way to his lecture, when a tourist stopped him and asked him for directions. As Fred was going in the same direction, he walked along with the tourist.
Step 7. Workbook
Homework
Lesson 62 Letters
Aims and demands:
Review how to write a letter and know develop the Ss’ four skills
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good understanding of the text and let them discuss how to deal with the difficult situation.
Teaching aids: tape recorder and some slides
Teaching method : reading
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming-up : story-telling (listen to the tape )
I’ve been working at a meat factory for about two months now. It’s a part-time job, so I only work evenings. I’ve recently noticed that one of my workmates is stealing. From time to time, I notice that he puts a piece of meat down his trousers just before he leaves the factory. Now the manager has found that things are missing. He says that all this happened after I started work.
What should I do?
Ss: discuss the question.
Step 2. Reading comprehension
Read the text ( three letters ) and do the comprehension exercises:
Workbook:------Exercise 2 . True or false
Paper exercise:
D 1. The two friends are writing to ______.
a) tell each other stories B. give each other information
C. persuade each other to change mind D. ask for and give advice
D 2. From John’s letter we can tell that _______.
A. he relies in friends B. he is not brave or independent enough
C. he doesn’t know how to solve the problem D. all of the above
A 3. Which of the following wards has the same meaning as “position” in John’s letter?
A. condition B. attitude C. job D. opinion
A 4. From Marty’s second letter we know he is _______.
A. brave and willing to fight for truth B. selfish
C. understanding, clever and careful D. brave but careless
A 5. The job that is not a part-time job is called ________.
A. a full-time job B. a half-time job C. a full-day job D. a half-day job
B 6. If someone says “ I am afraid that…” he / she is ________.
A. frightened B. polite C. worried D. unhealthy
Step 3. Exercises
Practice 4 in page 22 Exercise 3 in page 86
Step 4. Grammar
Passive voice and active voice
Do the exercises
Homework
Lesson 61~62
Aims and demands: Deal with the important language points.
Importance and difficulty: Grasp the usage of the language points
Teaching aids: some slides
Teaching methods: practicing
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Deal with the language points
Fill in the blanks: (Lesson 61~62)
1. Fred showed the tourist around the university instead of going to the lecture.
2. He had a gift for making the visit lively and interesting.
4. It is a good idea to start a part-time job so long as it does not affect your studies.
5. We should learn the value of money and learn how many hours’ work has to be done before we can buy something.
6. The employers value someone who leads an active life and is anxious to learn.
7. It’s a part-time job, so I only work evenings.
8. Maybe I should have told ( tell )that workmate I knew what he was doing. Or possibly I should have gone ( go ) to the manager and told him who was stealing meat.
9. It is quite possible that the thief might pot some meat in your bag, hoping ( hope ) you will be caught and called a thief.
10. In my personal opinion,（ 依我个人的意思 ） you should have done this as soon as you found out he was stealing.
11. There is no doubt about ( 对于……没有疑虑/ 怀疑 ) the correct thing to do.
Step 2. Explanation (on the Bb )
1. show … around
show …in
show … out
2. have a gift for
have no gift for
3. so long as
if
4. value n. 价值
value v. 珍视，器重
3. be anxious to do sth.
be anxious about / for sth.
4. evenings adv. 每天晚上
5. should have done
ought to have done
could have done
might have done
must have done
6. hoping 伴随状语
7. catch
catch sb. by the arm
catch sb. doing
be caught in the rain
catch what one said
catch it
8. in one’s personal opinion
in the opinion of sb. ( me , her, him , us…… )
11. There is no doubt about…… ( a set phrase ) 对于……没有怀疑/ 疑问
There is no doubt as to …… ( 关于 )
There is no doubt that……
Doubt vt.
Eg. There is no doubt as to the truth of the story. 故事的真实性无可置疑。
There is no doubt that he is a thief.
I doubt whether he will come.
Step 3. Exercises : Fill in the blanks ( Lesson 61~62 )
1. The doctors are anxious about / for his health.
2. I am anxious to have a new car.
3. He is a polite boy, whenever a guest leaves his home, he shows him out.
4. We’d better value the friendship between us.
5. She has a gift for music.
6. Most parents know the value of a good education .
7. You can go out so long as you promise to be back before 9 o’clock.
8. In the opinion of most people, the plan is good. So do I. So I stick to my opinion.
9. He studied days and worked evenings.
10. If your father sees you doing that, you’ll catch it.
11. Yesterday, on his way home, he was caught in the rain.
12. There is no doubt about / as to his honesty.
13. I believe what he said. That means I don’t doubt what he said.
There is no doubt about what he said.
14. The examination turned out easy.
15. The English evening turned out a great success.
16. I should have phoned ( phone ) Jack this morning, but I forgot.
17. The light is on. He must be ( be ) at home.
18. The light is on. He can’t have gone ( go ) out.
19. We could have walked ( walk ) to the station. A taxi wasn’t necessary at all.
20. I shouldn’t have used ( use ) your computer without your permission.
21. She shouldn’t / couldn’t have used ( use ) your computer without your permission.
Step 4. Workbook.
Homework
篇3：3B Unit19(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生应能熟练地运用表示“提意见和建议”的常用语；复习宾语；了解毛利人的历史和新西兰的历史、地理及风士人情。
Importance and difficulty:
1. words and expressions:
hand down, sign an agreement with, take a degree, share, times, live, go doing
2. sentences:
A. The language which the Maori speak is related to the languages of Tahiti and Hawaii.
B. This is how they keep their way of life alive.
C. In size it is bigger than Guangdong Province, yet has a much smaller population.
D. Apart from their milk, the wool from their coats is used in expensive clothing.
3. Grammar:
A. The search party found the missing child.
B. I enjoy swimming in summer.
C. I’d like to invite you to my birthday party.
D. I’ll get the letter mailed first.
4. Useful expressions:
A. You’d better ( not )……
B. You should / ought to ……
C. I suggest you ……
D. Shall we……
E. How / what about…….
Lesson 73 The Maori of New Zealand
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading and speaking ability.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good and deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aid; a tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Presentation
Find out how much the Ss know about New Zealand by asking a few rapid questions around the class.
T: Where is New Zealand?
----- East of Australia.
T: How many islands is New Zealand made up of ?
----- Two large ones.
T: What is the capital?
----- Wellington.
T: What money is used in New Zealand?
----- NZ dollar.
T: Name one sailor who landed on New Zealand several centuries ago.
----- Captain Cook.
T: What are the earliest people of New Zealand called? ( first settlers )
----- Maori .
T: Where did they come from?
----- Polynesia.
T: Where did the first settlers in the USA come from?
… in Australia
Step 2. Fast reading
Read the text fast and find the answers to the questions.
1. From which countries have the people of New Zealand come?
Polynesia / Oceania and Europe , mainly Britain.
2. What parts of Maori life are mentioned in the text?
Kindergartens, customs, way of life, the marae, the meeting house, family life, special days ---- huis, weddings, conferences, deaths and burials.
Step 3. Careful reading
1. Read it and do the reference
( Which words and phrases do the words in bold in the text refer to?)
2. Note making
Step 4. comprehension
1. paper comprehension
Comprehension for Unit 19 Lesson 73(3B) CDDCB BBDCC BD
1. The passage is mainly about ___.
A. why the Maori chose to settle in New Zealand
B. what the European settlers had done to the Maori
C. the history, life-style, languages and customs of the Maori
D. the rare animals and plants in New Zealand
2. The population is mainly made up of ___.
A. the Maori and Europeans
B. the Maori and Kooris
C. the Maori and Pacific Island
D. the Maori, Europeans and Pacific Islanders
3. When the Maori came to settle in New Zealand, they did NOT take ___ with them.
A. the way of life
B. dogs and rats
C. plants like the sweet potato
D. written records of their history
4. In the 19th century the Maori population dropped as a result of ___.
A. their improper way of life
B. the bad weather in the island
C. many fierce battles and diseases
D. lack of money and medicine
5. Which is WRONG about the languages spoken in New Zealand?
A. English is widely used as the official language.
B. The children in New Zealand are greatly encouraged to use the Maori language.
C. At least three kinds of languages are spoken in the country.
D. Maori children can learn to speak English at school.
6. It can be figured out that the population of New Zealand is about ____.
A. 435,000 B. 3,346,100 C. 5,5655,000 D. 170,000
7. We can learn what the text is about from ___.
A. the first paragraph B. the title
C. the last paragraph D. the whole passage
8. What did the Maori not take to New Zealand ?
A. Plants like the sweet potato B. Dogs
C. Rats D. Potatoes
9. How many kinds of languages are spoken in New Zealand according to the text?
A. one B. two C. three D. four
10. The difference between the Maori’s life and the Europeans’ life is in their ___.
A. dining habit B. clothing
C. family size D. living condition
11. What is written in details in the text?
A. Wedding B. Burial
C. Conference D. None of the above.
12. The Maori’s burial service is different from the European’s because ___.
A. they give speeches at the funeral
B. they go to see the dead
C. they share their memories of the dead
D. there’s always someone staying with the dead
2. work book
Bb:
Maori ----- Polynesia
wars
New Zealander European (British )----- Europe / Britain
Pacific Islanders----- Oceanis
Homework
Lesson 74 New Zealand
Aims and demands:
1. Get the Ss to read a text very fast in order to find out what the different sections about .
2. Train the Ss to obtain information from a diagram.
3. Develop the Ss’ reading ability.
Importance and difficulty:
1. Have a deeper understanding of the text.
2. Finish the comprehension exercise
Teaching methods: reading and understanding
Teaching aids : tape recorder and some slides
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Answer the questions:
1. What’s the other name for New Zealand? ----- Aotearoa
2. When did the first traveler reach New Zealand, 950, 1050 or 1150? -----950
3. What did early travelers bring with them?
---- Dogs, rats and plants like the sweet potato.
4. Which is warmer, North Island or South Island? Why?
---- North Island is warmer because it is closer to the equator.
5. What is the name of the earliest New Zealand people? ------Maori.
6. Where did they come from? ----- Polynesia
7. Why did settlers and the Maori fight? ----- Over land rights
Rearrange the following sentences:
1. Following his discoveries many islanders travelled 3,500 kilometres by sea in their narrow boats to this new country between 1100 and 1350.
2. As a result of these wars and diseases, the Maori population fell from 100,000 to 4,200.
3. In Maori history, the first traveler to reach New Zealand in the year 950 was a man called Kupe.
4. By 1840 about 2,000 Europeans, mainly British, had come to settle in New Zealand and the Maori signed and agreement with these settlers.
5. However, in later years there were fierce arguments over land rights and many battles were fought between the settlers and the Maori.
6. He named the country “ Ao-tea-roa”, which means “the land of the long, white cloud”.
7. They took with them dogs, rats and plants like the sweet potato, and settled mainly in North Island where the weather was warmer.
8. Their population has now increased to 435,000 , and today they make up about 13% of the population.
3-6-1-7-4-5-2-8
Step 2. Reading for general understanding ( 3 minutes )
The purpose of this task is to get the Ss to read a text very fast in order to find out what the different sections are about. It is a speed-reading exercise.
Give the Ss a time limit of 3 minutes for this exercise.
Answers: Politics – Agriculture – Sports and free time – Natural beauty – Wildlife
Step 3. Careful reading
1. Read it carefully and finish the paper comprehension exercises.
Reading comprehension for Unit 19 Lesson 74 (3B) ACBCA CABDB BD
1. Which is correct about New Zealand?
A. Before 1893 women couldn’t enjoy the same voting rights just as men.
B. There are about 50 million sheep in the country, more than 14 times the population.
C. People over a certain age can all receive a weekly “old-age pension” nowadays.
D. The government is quite successful in controlling the unemployment rate.
2. Which is not the reason for the question “Why New Zealand is thought to be an important agricultural country”?
A. Animal farming is well developed.
B. There are more sheep than people.
C. Deer are kept for their meat and fur.
D. The main exports are agricultural products.
3. According to the passage, which is most likely to happen in New Zealand?
A. The country imports wood pulp(纸浆).
B. Earthquakes will shake the country.
C. Winter vacation starts from December.
D. Farmers begin to keep deer instead of cattle.
4. There are flightless birds in New Zealand because___.
A. these birds are kept in cages for a long time and lose the ability to fly
B. they caught the strange diseases which settlers took with them
C. they had no natural enemies until the arrival of humans
D. as in Australia, the climate there is quite suitable for birds to live on the land
5. After reading the text you cannot have a picture of ___.
A. the history of New Zealand
B. the climate in New Zealand
C. the agriculture in New Zealand
D. the strange animals in New Zealand
6. What is not true about New Zealand?
A. New Zealand is the first the allow women to vote in the world.
B. New Zealand exports mainly agricultural products.
C. All the people can receive the :old-age pension”.
D. All the people above a certain age can receive the “old-age pension”.
7. What is not included in the exported agricultural products?
A. Pork B. Lamb C. Beef D. Butter
8. What fruit is implied (暗指) in the text?
A. Apple B. Grape C. Pear D. Banana
9. In New Zealand only the kiwi is ___.
A. ancient B. flightless
C. voiceless D. the national bird
10. Who made the birds flightless?
A. The birds themselves. B. Nature.
C. Some biologists. D. Natural enemies.
11. The main school holidays in New Zealand are about ____ month(s).
A. one B. one and a half
C. two D. two and a half.
12. It can be inferred that New Zealand is not an ideal place for ___.
A. having sports B. going sight-seeing
C. keeping cattle and goats
D. developing heavy industry
2. True or False statements.
a. New Zealand is an important agricultural country with a small population. In size it is bigger than Guangdong Province, yet has a much smaller population.
b. In 1893, many countries, including New Zealand, allowed women to vote.
c. In recent times the “ old-age pension” has only been paid to the poorest people because these people are usually very old.
d. The main school holidays are from mid-December till early February because the weather is usually very cold.
e. Tourists from all over the world come to New Zealand because they are attracted by the natural beauty of the country.
f. The Kiwi, New Zealand’s national bird is flight-less because this kind of bird is very huge and it cannot fly.
Answers: T F F F T F
Step 4. Practice Workbook Ex 2
Step 5. Diagram Page 40
Homework
Lesson 73~ 74
Aims and demands: Review the text and deal with the language points.
Importance and difficulty: Get the Ss know the usage of the language points.
Teaching aid: some slides.
Teaching methods: practicing and comparison
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Say as quickly as possible and tell if the following statements are True or False.
1. All the people of New Zealand came from the Islands of Polynesia in the Pacific.
2. The Maori had no written language.
3. By 1840 about 2,000 British had come to settle in New Zealand.
4. Now the Maori makes up about 13% of the population.
5. They have a population of 4, 200.
6. The Maori have given up their own customs and ways of life.
7. New Zealand is an important industrial country with a small population
8. New Zealand was the first nation in modern times to allow women to vote.
9. North Island is famous for its hot springs.
10. New Zealanders like to go swimming, sailing , horse-riding during the months of December-February.
F T F T F F F T T T
Step 2. Useful expressions
Fill in the blanks ( Lesson 73~ 74)
1. Ireland lies to the west of Great Britain. They are separated from each other by the Irish sea.
2. I have bought a dictionary for you and I’ll send it to you by mail as soon as possible.
3. The two tables are of the same size, but they are different in colour.
4. They have made much money out of keeping fish.
5. Apart from the garden, I’m quite satisfied with the house.
6. Their customs were handed down/on from generation to generation.
7. Their population has now increased to 420,000 . That makes up about 13% of the whole population.
8. I insist on him changing his learning methods, but he sticks to it.
9. Can you explain the sentences to me which are marked with red lines?
10. Would you like to stay with us for a few more days?
Step 3. Language points:
Fill in the blanks ( Lesson 73~74)
1. They took with them dogs, rats and plants like the sweet potato and settled mainly in North Island.
要下雨了，请带把雨伞。
我没有带钱，请你借我10 元好吗？
2. The language which the Maori speak is related to the languages of Tahiti and Hawaii.
relate vt. 把 … 联系起来
be related to 和 … 有联系
3. Maori family enjoy sharing what they own and looking after one another.
enjoy doing consider , dislike , finish , go ,mink , practise , risk , suggest , avoid , appreciate, feel like , give up …
4. This is how they keep their way of life alive.
alive
live
living
5. The fish is still alive .
6. This is a live fish .
7. All living things need sunlight , water and air.
8. Although he is sixty, he is still alive.
9. Many people will sleep and eat on the marae during these three days and share their memories of the dead person.
10. She is always happy and never shares his parents’ worries ( 从不分担父母的忧愁 )
我们应该共甘同苦。
We should share joys and sorrows.
11. New Zealand is an important agriculture country with a small population.
中国是一个人口众多的发展中的国家。
China is a developing country with a large population.
12. It is bigger than Guangdong province in size.
13. The two countries are of the same size, but they are different in population.
14. The main exports of the country are wool, lamb, beef butter, forest products, fruit and vegetables ( 水果和蔬菜 ).
15. Some farmers have turned tokeeping deer (养鹿).
16. Whenever he had difficulty, he turned to the teacher for help( 他就去向老师求助 ).
turn to
turn on
turn off
turn down
turn into
turn out
turn over
17. New Zealand wine is of high quality and is sold all over the world.
be of high quality =high-qualified
be of great help =helpful
be of importance =important
be of great value =valuable
18. Apart from their milk, the wool from their coats is used in expensive clothing.
19．Apart from English , he is good at French. ( Besides )
20. There were ten people at the meeting apart from me. (besides)
21. The composition is good apart from a few spelling mistakes. ( except for)
22. North Island is famous for an area of hot spring, some of which throw hot water high into the air.
23. Hongzhou is famous for its West Lake.
24. Helen Keller was famous as an American writer.
Step 4. Correct the mistakes:
1. All things are related with all other things.
(to)
2. Mary and I will share with a room. /
3. Besides from the cost, it will take a lot of time. ( Apart ) from /
4. We have reported the matter to the master but he considers it of no important. (importance )
5. In this factory the workers are paid by hour. ( by the hour ) (by hours)
6. The rice is sold by the weight. /
7. When time went on, Einstein’s theory was proved to be correct. ( As )
8. After he left school he became a teacher , but later he turned to drive. ( driving )
Homework
篇4：3B Unit17(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用表示“请求允许”的常用语；复习表语，连习动词的用法；了解海伦 凯勒自强和她的老师的敬业精神。
Importance and difficulty;
Words : born, bring…into touch with, look back , get back, pity
Important sentences:
1. A born teacher, she thought she could turn a deaf-blind person into a useful human being.
2. What a difficult case I must have been to this young teacher!
3. One of the first things Annie did was to teach me how to play.
4. It took great imagination as well as patience for Annie to teach me to speak.
Grammar:
1. Fish goes bad easily in Summer.
2. The news sounds exciting.
3. The shop stays open until 10 p.m.
4. The tree grows taller day by day.
5. The theory proved true.
Useful expressions:
1. May / Can / Could I …?
2. I wonder if I could ……?
3. Do you mind if I…?
4. Sure.
5. Go ahead.
6. I’m sorry, but…
Lesson 65 My teacher
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good understanding of the text.
Teaching method: reading
Teaching aids: Tape recorder and some slides.
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
Questions:
T: If a person cannot see anything at all, that person is said to be blind.
If he can’t hear anything at all, he is said to be deaf.
Do you know any people who cannot see well or can’t hear well? (Beethoven)
(later) People who are blind can learn to read books that are printed in a special way.
What is the name of this writing system?
------ Braille.
How do people read Braille books?
------ By touching raised dots on the paper with their fingers.
Talk about the picture in the text book.
Step 2. Fast reading
Read it quickly and find the answers to the questions.
1. What was the writer’s problem?
------She was deaf and blind and couldn’t speak.
2. What did the writer learn during this period of her life?
----- She learned the meaning of words, she learnt to play and to laugh.
Step 3. Comprehension
Read it carefully and do the comprehension exercises.
Comprehension exercises for Unit 17 (Lesson 65) 3B CCCBB ABBC
1. Helen Keller seemed simple-minded ___.
A. after Annie came to stay in her house
B. so she was often made fun of by others
C. because she struggled in a silent, dark world
D. just because she couldn’t hear anything
2. Helen Keller came to understand the meaning of the word “water” ____.
A. in the kitchen B. in a river
C. at the well D. in her own house
3. According to Paragraph 3 , the following mistakes EXCEPT “ ____” can be found in the picture at the top the page.
A. Helen was holding a cup, not a jar
B. Helen and her teacher seemed to be indoors, not at the well
C. Helen was smiling, not being moved to tears
D. Annie was holding Helen’s hands, not pumping
4. Annie put the writer’s hand on her face so that Helen could ___.
A. know what she looked like
B. connect the movement of her laughing with its meaning
C. laugh in the same way as she did
D. feel how happy she was when teaching Helen
5. What impressed Helen Keller most was Annie’s __.
A. patience B.wisdom C.imagination D.character
6. Annie Sullivan came to Helen’s house ___.
A. in March, 1887
B. in April, 1887
C. in May, 1887
D. when Helen was 19 months old
7. Which words in Paragraph 4 show that the writer was eager to learn more?
A. reach out B. beg for C. joy D. touch
8. As the writer learned more and more, ___.
A. she could speak
B. she enjoyed learning
C. she could “heard” sounds
D. She became a teacher, too
9. Which happened last?
A. The girl learned how to jump
B. The girl “heard” the sound that one hears on a farm
C. The girl learned words like soil, wood and silk
D. The girl met her teacher, Annie Sullivan
Correct the mistakes in the article if necessary:
Helen Keller was born a healthy normal child in 1880.
However,an illness strikes her when was only 19 months, 1.___
thus leaving her deaf, blind and unable to speak. For little 2.___
Helen, the world suddenly became a dark, frightened place. 3.___
Several years late, Annie Sullivan,a strong-minded and loving 4.___
people, became Helen’s teacher.Miss Sullivan’s teaching 5.___
changed a wild child into useful human being. 6.___
By her help, Helen Keller learned to talk with those 7.___
around her.As she was grew older, she became a writer. 8.___
People benefited her works and her courage.Helen 9.___
Keller died in 1968,and her spirit lives on. 10.___
1. paper comprehension
2. Listen to the tape and explain the phrases .
Step 4. Practice
1. Word study
2. Workbook
Homework: Workbook
Lesson 66 My teacher (2)
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good understanding of the text.
Teaching method: reading
Teaching aids: Tape recorder and some slides.
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
What do you think of Helen’s teacher?
Step 2. Reading for general understanding
1. Where did the writer’s teacher Annie grow up?
------ In a children’s home and an institution for the blind.
2. What did Annie help the writer to do?
------ to understand words, to get information from books that were not printed in Braille, and to speak.
Step 3. Comprehension
1. Workbook
2. paper comprehension
Reading comprehension for Unit 17 Lesson 66 ( 3A ) CCCDC DBABD D
1. Annie entered an institution to learn Braille ___.
A. in 1866 B. in 1876 C. in 1880 D. in 1872
2. Which of the following is TRUE about Braille?
A. It was Annie who invented Braille.
B. It is special writing system for both the blind and the deaf.
C. Blind people can read by touching raised points on paper.
D. Annie helped to develop the writing system.
3. Why did Annie decide to go to stay with Helen?
A. Because she needed a highly paid job.
B. Because she was deaf-blind herself and sympathized (同情) with Helen.
C. Because it was the very job she had expected.
D. Because she was deeply moved by the letter from Helen’s dad.
4. Annie did NOT help Helen Keller to ___.
A. understand words
B. read books printed in Braille
C. learn how to speak
D. develop the writing system of Braille
5. Which is TRUE about the period when Annie worked as Helen’s teacher?
A. The disabled were all well educated
B. A god many books were printed in Braille.
C. Few people realized the hidden strength in blind people
D. Many deaf-blind children had the chance of being taught to speak like normal people
6. Annie would praise Helen when she ____.
A. decided to go to college
B. had a very difficult time
C. understood the meaning of words
D. did things as well as a normal person
7. Braille is a ____.
A. book for blind people
B. kind of printing for blind people to read
C. copy of reading for the deaf and the blind
D. book for the teacher of the blind people
8. Annie learned Braille because ___.
A. she had been sent to study in an institution for the blind
B. she wanted to teach the blind people
C. she wanted to be the writer’s teacher
D. she loved the blind people
9. How did Annie treat the girl?
A. She always pitied and praised her.
B. She treated her with much care, great patience and encouragement.
C. She treated her just like normal child.
D. She treated her with imagination.
10. How did Annie teach the girl?
A. She spelled words into the girl’s hand.
B. She put the girl’s hands in her face and let the girl feel the movements of her lips and throat.
C. She let the girl hear her voice.
D. Both A land B.
11. What words that Annie said helped the girl to be successful all through her life?
A. Never fail.
B. Never be disappointed.
C. Never forget to read Braille.
D. Keep on beginning.
Step 4. Note making
1. What did Annie learn to do?
----To read/ learn Braille, teach deaf-blind children (and spell out words by hand.)
2. What did Annie teach the writer?
Skills: Understand words, read Braille; speak
Ideas: blind people should be treated like normal human beings; keep on trying until you succeed.
Step 5. Writing
Story telling------ write a passage according to these pictures. You may begin like this:
Ann Sullivan was born in 1866 and became an orphan when she was young. She spent her childhood in a children’s home. Then she went to an institution for the blind. There she learnt…Braille and studied the teaching of deaf-blind children. One day the head of the institution for the blind handed over a letter to Ann. The letter came from Helen Keller’s parents. They wanted to invite a teacher for Helen. Ann was glad to accept the invitation. Ann taught Helen by asking her to touch the teacher’s face, throat and lips so as to know the meaning of the words and to form speech. Later, Helen could say “mother” , which made her parents very happy. In the school, Ann sat beside Helen in every class during her school years. She spelled out for her the things that the teachers taught, because most books were not printed in Braille at that time.
Lesson 65~66 My teacher
I. Describe the life of Annie Sullivan using information from the text.
1. Date of birth
2. Her childhood
3. Her education
4. How she became the writer’s teacher
II. Describe how Annie Sullivan taught the little girl .
1. How did the little girl learn her first word?
2. What had Annie done in order to teach the little girl some water?
3. How did Annie teach the little girl to laugh, to jump and so on?
4. What did Annie encourage the little girl to do and how did Annie help her?
I. suggested answers
1. Annie was born on April 4th, 1866.
2. Her family was very poor. When she was eight years old, her mother died and her father disappeared two years later. Annie, together with her brother, was sent to a children’s home. But unfortunately, her brother died there later.
3.When she was fourteen, she left the children’s home and entered an institution for the blind. There, she learnt Braille, which is a kind of printing that blind people can read by touching groups of raised points that are printed on paper.
4. One day the school where Annie was received a letter. The letter asked for a teacher for a seven-year-old girl who at the age of 19 months had become deaf and blind. Annie considered this was just the kind of demanding job she wanted.
II. suggested answers
1. It happened that one day the little girl was holding a jar while Annie pumped water. As the water flowed onto the little girl’s hand, Annie kept spelling w-a-t-e-r onto the girl’s other hand with her fingers. Suddenly the little girl understood!
2. Many times Annie had tried to spell words into the little girl’s small hands in order to teach her some words.
3. One day Annie came into the girl’s room laughing happily. Then she put the girl’s little hand on her face and spelled l-a-u-g-h. Then Annie touched the girl lightly on her arm and made her burst into laughter. Next Annie took the girl by the hand and taught her how to jump. She then immediately spelled the word j-u-m-p for the girl.
4. Annie encouraged her when the little girl made up her mind to go to college. At school, Annie sat beside her in every class. She spelled out for the little girl the things that the teachers taught. Annie herself read the books to her by spelling into her hand what was written in the books.
Lesson 65~66 My teacher ( Language points )
Aims and demands:
Grasp the important language points
Importance and difficulty: let the Ss know the usage of them
Teaching aids: some slides
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Language points:
Fill in the blanks:(Lesson 65~66)
1. Some people thought the writer was simple-minded because she was deaf and blind.
2. Being a born teacher she could turn a deaf-blind person into a useful human being.
3. I understood what the teacher was doing. That mean: The teacher reached my understanding.
4. I reached out to Annie’s hand to beg for new words.
5. She touched me lightly on the arm and made me burst into laughter.
6. My teacher took me by the hand and taught me how to jump.
7. She also brought me into/in touch with everything that could be felt---- soil, wood, silk.
8. As I look back upon these years, I am struck by Annie’s wisdom.
9. Later, an operation helped her to get back part of her sight, but she remained at the institution for six years more.
10. Annie considered this was just the kind of demanding job she wanted.
11. Annie was among the first to realize that blind people never know their hidden strength until they are treated liked normal human beings.
Never …until 只有… 之后才 ，比 not … until 的否定意味更强
12. I owe thanks to Annie for this priceless gift of speech.
13. My teacher’s gifted instruction lived on after her death.
14. Annie often said, no matter what happens, keep on beginning.
Step 2. Language points ( on the Bb )
1. simple-minded 头脑简单的
absent-minded 心不在焉的
noble-minded 思想高尚的
small-minded 气量小的
2. a born teacher 一位天生的老师
3. reach one’s understanding 达到、触及
reach out ( one’s hand ) for sth. 伸手去够、、、
4. burst into laughter
burst out laughing
5. take sb. by the hand
touch sb. on the arm
hit sb. on the head
hit sb. in the face
v. +sb. on/ in / by + the + part of a body
6. bring…… into / in touch with 使、、、触摸， 使、、、接触
7. look back upon / on
8. strike –struck – struck 给、、、印象
strike –struck –stricken
9. get back return to a former condition 恢复
come back 回来
move backwards or away 后退
regain 收回
10. for six years more
for six more years
for another six years
11. a demanding job 要付出努力的工作
12. not …….until 直到、、、才
never ……until 只有、、、之后才
13. owe……to sb 欠某人某物（钱，债）
owe thanks to sb. for sth. 归功于、、、对、、、感激
14. live on 继续存在， 流传下去
live on sth. 以、、、为食
15. no matter ……
16. keep on doing 不可接表示静止状态的-ing形式
keep doing
(It’s not allowed to say keep on waiting / sleeping/ sitting)
Step 3.Practice ----- Exercises
Fill in the blanks with a proper word ( Lesson 65~ 66)
1. Beethoven was gifted in music, so he was thought to be a born musician.
2. He reached out and took down a dictionary from the shelf.
3. The boy reached out his hand for an apple.
4. At last they reached a decision. ( an agreement )
5. When she arrived home, she began to do cooking.
6. She touched the baby lightly on the arm in order to make her burst into laughter.
7. The stone hit him on the head, and he was sent to hospital at once.
8. This can bring me into / in touch with many workers.
9. Her love of music brought her into touch with the pop. Star.
10. As we looked back upon the school years we spent together , we were very excited./we were filled with excitement.
11. He looked back upon / on his childhood with mixed feelings.
12. All of us were struck by the professor’s speech.
13. The performance of the singers struck the audience greatly.
14. She has got her strength back after her illness.
15. I will get back at 7 o’clock this evening.
16. I decided to get back the dictionary.
17. I need five minutes more to finish the job.
I need five more minutes to finish the job.
I need another five minutes.
18. Although this was a demanding job which others were unwilling to do, she didn’t refuse it.
19. Don’t get off the bus until it stops. 停车之前不要下车。
Never get off the bus until it stops. 停车之前千万不要下车。
20. ----How much did you owe to the American couple? Shall I pay it for you?
---- Thank you. I can manage it myself.
21. We all owe our happy life to the Party.
22. This custom will live on for centuries.
23. LeiFeng is dead, but he will live on in the hears of the people forever.
24. No matter what you do, do it well.
25. Don’t give up , keep on trying.
26. The teacher kept on asking the students questions until the bell rang.
27. He caught such a bad cold that he kept coughing all morning.
Homework :Do the workbook exercises
篇5：3B Unit18(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用“打电话”的常用语；复习第13~17单元的语法项目；了解办公设备现代化和有关放火安全的知识。
Importance and difficulty:
1. words and expressions:
rush sb. off his feet, change, action, repair, work on, fix up
2. important sentences:
A. It is better to ask for help at the beginning rather than to wait until a busy period when everyone is rushed off their feet.
B. What is more, this “information line” operates 24 hours a day.
C. It did not take the firefighters long to pot out the fire, and they at once started to look for causes of the fire.
D. They had to work inside the ship, cutting away old metal, fixing new metal plate, drilling holes, laying electrical and phone wires and fixing new pipes for water and steam.
3. Grammar: review –ing form, to do form and predicative
4. Useful expressions:
A. May I speak to …?
B. Hello. Who’s that speaking?
C. I called to tell you…..
D. Hold on, please.
E. Wait a moment.
F. Can I take ( leave ) a message?
Lesson 69 The office
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability
Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading, speaking
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Riddle
I can store and recall as much information as possible, and I can work at a very high speed. In modern times, you can’t work without me. What am I? ( computer )
Step 2. Warming up
T: Where can you find computer?
S: They are mostly found in offices……
T: What else may you expect find in a large modern office?
( write these words on the blackboard and read after the teacher)
the office
fax machine
photocopier
word processor
answering machine
choose the right title for each section
Step 3. Deal with the text
T: What is the fax machine? How does it work?
S: When you place a sheet of paper in a fax machine, the machine “reads” the writing on the page and changes the shapes of letters into electronic signals. It then sends these signals down an ordinary telephone line to another fax machine, which changes the signals back into the shapes of letters.
T: What are the advantages of sending a fax?
Ss: Speed. You can send texts, pictures, diagrams, designs maps and so on .
T: What are the disadvantages of sending a fax?
Ss: It is expensive and not private. ( it can be read by anyone)
T: What is the photocopier? How does it work?
Ss: It can copy a long report and sort the copies and pin them together.
T: What can modern photocopying machines do?
Ss: Modern machines can make the copy bigger or smaller , lighter or darker and copy onto both sides of the paper.
T: What is the word processor? How many parts is the word processor made up of?
Ss: It is made up of three parts . ( a typewriter keyboard, a printer and a computer )
T: What are the advantages of a word processor?
Ss: You can make changes easily and can print a report very quickly.
T: What is the answering machine?
Ss: It is a telephone with a tape recorder.
T: What are the advantage of an answering machine?
Ss: It can receive messages when no one is in the office and can give information.
Step 4. Listening for general understanding
Listen to the tape and write down the headings above the right sections of the text.
Step 5. Comprehension
1. Work book on Page 93
2. Paper comprehension
Homework
Comprehension exercise for Unit 18 Lesson 69 (3B)
I. Main facts: DBAC
Read fast to get a general idea of the passage and fill in the following blanks with one of the four choices below.
A. The word processor
B. The fax machine
C. The answering machine
D. The photocopier
1. ____ is a type of machine used to make copies from newspapers, books or reports.
2. ____ is used to send messages including words , pictures, designs and maps.
3. ____ is a kind of machine used to type materials, save them for future use and make changes if necessary.
4. ____ is used to record telephone messages when the receiver is absent.
II. Further comprehension CCADC DBBD
1. Which is WRRONG about learning to use office equipment?
A. It can make the work in offices go smoothly .
B. It is necessary for beginners in offices.
C. It should be learnt during a busy period.
D. It may help you to get a promotion (普升机会).
2. Which is correct about sending a fax?
A. It can be done only during working hours.
B. Sometimes it might take a week or so.
C. It isn’t a good choice to send top-secret information by fax machine.
D. Reports in English cannot be faxed.
3. A word processor ____.
A. can type a long report and make changes
B. can produce colour copies when necessary
C. can send information both at home and abroad
D. includes a keyboard, a photocopier and a computer
4. ____ can be used to answer a phone call automatically (自动地) when you are out.
A. The photocopier B. The fax machine
C. The word processor D. The answering machine
5. What is one disadvantage of sending a fax?
A. We can send a fax only in the office hours.
B. Message sent by a fax are hard to read.
C. We cannot send secret information through a fax machine.
D. Foreigners cannot understand Chinese letters sent by a fax.
6. What can’t a word processor do?
A. Typing a letter.
B. Printing documents.
C. Coping a on report.
D. Sending picture.
7. What does “be rushed off one’s feet” mean in paragraph 1?
A. be on business B. be busy and tired
C. be tired out D. run out of the office
8. The writer says “The fax has greatly changed office work, especially in China.” Because ____.
A. it can send information quickly
B. it is much easier to change Chinese characters into electronic signals
C. it can do a lot of work for the Chinese people such as making copies, posting letters
D. it makes office work easy to do
9.“The fax has greatly changed office work,especially in China.” The underlined word means ____.
A. properly B. immediately
C. slightly D. particularly
Lesson 70 What causes the fire
Aims and demands:
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability
Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading, speaking
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Presentation
Talk about the picture
T: What may cause a fire?
---- smoking, playing with fire ……
T: What is often used to put out the fire?
---- Water, CO……
T: What kind of gas do we breathe?
( Name some of the gases in the air we breathe. )
---- Oxygen, hydrogen……
People may be in danger if there is not enough oxygen. But too much oxygen may cause danger to people , too.
Step 2. Reading for general understanding
Read the text and find out :
1. Where did the fire happen?
----- In a ship which was in a port in Scotland for repairs.
2. What started the fire?
----- A worker fixed the air-line to a supply of oxygen instead of compressed air.
Step 3. Problem solving
See which pair of Ss can find out the correct answer before the others.
---- The man actually connected the air-line to the oxygen supply line.
Step 4. Comprehension
1. put these events in the correct order
9-12-6-13-1-4-11-8-3-10-14-7-5-2
2. workbook Ex I
3.reading comprehension
Comprehension for Unit 18 Lesson 70 (3B) BDBCD ACAB
1. An extra team of men were sent to repair the ship because ___.
A. this ship was a huge ship
B. this ship needed to be repaired quickly
C. they were skilled workers
D. there was a lot of work to do
2. The man took a long time to connect the rubber pipe to the air supply pipe because ___.
A. he smoked a cigarette during the working hours
B. he had to drill holes and lay electrical wires first
C. he found something strange in the air and stopped to have a check
D. the fittings did not match
3. There was a strange smell when one man lit a cigarette because ___.
A. the cigarette had the smell itself
B. the smell was caused by the oxygen
C. there was something wrong with the man’s nose
D. the ship was beginning to burn
4. Which of the following is true?
A. The fire caused great damage to the ship.
B. There was an explosion happened inside the ship.
C. No damage was done to the deck at the end of the ship.
D. The fuel on ship caused the fire.
5. What measures were taken to prevent a fire accident?
A. Talks on safety were given to new workers.
B. Smoking was not allowed in the workplace.
C. All the supply lines and taps were marked with signs and warnings.
D. Both A and C.
6. In the ship the “air-line” provides ____.
A. compressed air B. water and steam
C. fuel and gas D. fresh air
7. When the fire broke out, ____.
A. some men sounded the fire alarm
B. all the men jumped into the sea
C. most of the men managed to escape
D. they fought against the fire
8. The men’s cigarettes burned strangely and tasted bad because ____ .
A. there was too much oxygen inside
B. something was wrong with the cigarettes
C. oxygen had a strong smell
D. lots of compressed air was inside
9. What was the real cause of the fire?
A. The third person struck a match for a cigarette.
B. The air-line was fixed to a supply line of oxygen instead of compressed air.
C. Too many workers smoked in the ship.
D. The fittings the workers had used to repair the ship didn’t match.
4. slides
Rearrange the following events ( Lesson 70 )
a. It took him some time to connect the long rubber pipe to the air supply pipe that ran round the port, but at last it was done and as a result work was able to progress much faster.
b. Half an hour later, another man struck a match for a cigarette and this time the whole of the inside of the ship caught fire.
c. They had to work inside the ship.
d. A navy ship was in a port in Scotland for repairs.
e. It was important to carry out the work quickly, so an extra team of men were asked to work on the repairs one evening.
f. Another man lit a cigarette but it burnt strangely and so he too put it out.
g. One man was told to fix up an “air-line” to provide compressed air for the machines they were using.
h. After three hours, the men stopped for a meal break. When work continued, one man lit a cigarette as he was working, but, finding it had a strange taste, he put it out.
d-e-c-g-a-h-f-b
Step 5. practice ----- Ex 2
Homework
Lesson 69~70
Translate the following sentences (Lesson 69~70)
1． 一旦他作出决定就不会改变。
Once she made the decision, she wouldn’t change her mind.
2． 我到过那儿一次。
I have been there once.
3． 这是她父亲曾经工作过的地方。
This is the place where her father once worked.
4． 该去的是約翰而不是杰克。
John should go rather than Jack.
5． 这些鞋子穿起来很舒服，但并不漂亮。
These shoes are comfortable rather than pretty.
I love swimming rather than skating.
I decided to write rather than ( to ) telephone.
We ought to check up, rather than just accept what he says / accepting what he says.
6． 与其让这些蔬菜烂掉，他宁愿以一半的价格把他们卖掉。
Rather than allow the vegetables to go bad, he sold them at half price.
Would / had rather do sth than do…
Would / had rather sb. did…
I would rather you knew that now than afterwards.
7． 他们播种忙得个不可开交。( rush sb. off one’s feet )
They are rushed off their feet with the sowing.
8． 没有必要对这个计划作出修改。
It is not necessary to make any changes in the plan.
9． 我觉得是我该采取行动的时候了。
I felt it ( was ) time for me to take ( an ) action.
10． 我没有去看望王先生，因为那天下大雨. 再说，我身边也没有他的地址。
I didn’t go to see Mr. Smith , because it was raining hard. What’s more, I didn’t have his address.
11． 中国有许多人正在从事一项“希望工程”，帮助穷苦孩子们上学。
Many people in China are working on a “Project Hope” , helping poor children to go to school.
12． 他在致力于发明一种办公用的新式机器。
He is working on inventing a new type of machine for office work.
13． 他不得不工作到六十多岁。
He has to work on until he was sixty.
14． 政府给无家可归的人提供食宿。
The government provided food and shelter for those who were homeless / the homeless.
The government supplied (provide ) the homeless with food and shelter.
15． 他们在忙着安装电灯。
They are busy fixing up the lights.
Translate:
A. He fixed up the broken chair. 修理
B. I can easily fix you up for the night. 给…... 安排住处
C. We have fixed up a date for the picnic. 确定
D. I’ve fixed up a visit to the theater for next Friday. 安排
E. Do I have to fix up to go to the party. 打扮
16． 花了我一整天的时间修理这台彩电。
It took me a whole day to fix up the colour TV set.
17． 你应该争取尽快赶到那儿。
You should try to get there as soon as you can.
You should try to get there as soon as possible.
18． 许多人逃出大火着火了。
Many people escaped from the big fire, with their clothes on fire.
19． 老师走进教室，手里拿着一本书。
The teacher came into the classroom, with a book in his hand.
( book in hand )
20． 她似乎（已经）听到了这件事。
She appeared / seemed to have heard about it already.
It seemed / appeared that she had already heard about it.
21． 房子烧了，准是有什么原因。
The house was burned down. There must have been some cause.
22． 这婴孩昨夜哭个不停，他准是得了病。
The baby kept crying last night . He must have been ill.
篇6：写作常用句型(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
1.there be
There is a tall tree in front of our teaching building.
There are some students playing football on the playground.
2. think/find it + adj for sb to do sth
(1).I find it necessary to take down notes while listening.
(2).I feel it important to have some working experience.
(3).I found it impossible for me to work out all the problems in such a short time.
3. not…until
(1).I didn’t know the truth until she told me what happened.
(2).Yesterday I didn’t go to sleep until midnight.
4. Some…others
(1).Everyone is busy in classroom. Some are reading, others are writing.
(2).There are many foreign students in our class. Some of them are from Europe, others come from America.
5. not only…but also
(1).In just three years, she had not only finished all the lessons, but also received her doctor’s degree.
(2).Forests can not only fresh the air but also reduce noises.
6. such…that / so…that
(1).He is such a good student that everyone likes him.
(2).We were so deeply moved that we could not fall asleep that night.
7.too…to…
(1).They were too angry to say a word that day.
(2).He is too young to go to school.
8. in order to
(1).He worked very hard in order to realize his dream.
(2).In order to get there on time,we set off early in the morning.
9.be about to do sth when…/be doing sth when…
(1).I was about to go out when the telephone rang.
(2).I was walking in the street when I heard a lady cry “Help,help”.
10.used to
(1).He used to live in Shanghai.
(2).There used to be a tree in front of my house.
11.see/hear/watch/find sb do sth/doing sth
(1).I heard someone laughing.
(2).I saw him put the key in the lock,turn it and open the door.
12. have some difficulty in doing sth/with sth
Do you have any difficulty in understanding spoken English?
13.be busy doing sth/with sth
He was busy getting ready for his journey.
练习一：根据上下文关系用连接词把下列各句连接起来，组成一个单句、并列句或复合句。
1.a) Go to see the doctor at once.
b) Your cold may get worse.
Go to see the doctor at once, or your cold may get worse.
2. a) Alice was the first to complete her paper.
b) Alice made quite a few mistakes in her paper.
Alice was the first to complete her paper, but she made quite a few mistakes in it.
3. a) We were about to start off last night.
b) The phone in the living room began to ring.
We were about to start off last night when the phone in the living room began to ring.
4. a) Unfortunately, John’s car broke down on the way home.
b) John had to stop a car for a lift.
Unfortunately, John’s car broke down on the way home, so he had to stop a car for a lift.
5). a) He has made great progress in his studies.
b) All the teachers praise him.
He has made such great progress in his studies that all the teachers praise him.
6. a) Some people waste food.
b) Other people haven’t enough food.
Some people waste food, while others haven’t enough food.
7. a) It’s too late to go to the cinema now.
b) I have an important meeting to attend after lunch.
It’s too late to go the cinema now. Besides, I have an important meeting to attend after lunch.
8. a) Your aunt has no other thought but what is best for you.
b) I have no other thought, either.
Neither your aunt nor I have any other thought but what is best for you.
练习二：1、用but,then,instead,the next moment,when填空：
The accident happened at 7:15 on the morning of February 8, . I was walking along Park Road towards the east when an elderly man came out of the park on the opposite side of the street. Then I saw a yellow car drive up Third Street and make a sudden right turn into Park Road. The next moment the car hit the old man. He fell down with a cry. But the car didn’t stop to save the old man. Instead，it drove off at great speed.
2、用at last,then,so,up to now,that,when填空：
Don’t Lose Your Courage
Never shall I forget the first English lesson given by Miss Liu. On that day, when she entered the classroom, we found that she was a young and beautiful lady with a big smile on her face. Then she introduced herself saying that we should call her Miss Liu instead of Teacher Liu, a moment later, she let all of us go to the blackboard and say something about ourselves in English in turn. When it was my turn, I felt so shy and fearful that I didn’t dare to say a word before the class. She came up to me and said kindly, “Don’t be afraid. I believe you can do it. Come and have a try.” My face turned red when I heard that. At last, I went to the blackboard and was able to do it quite well. She praised for what I had done. Up to now, I can still remember her words in the first English lesson: “Practice makes perfect. Don’t lose your courage when you meet with difficulties. Try on and on until you succeed.”
篇7：Listening for workbook(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Part 1
Before a record is accepted by the Guinness Book of World Records, it must pass the following tests. First of all, there must be at least two witnesses. The witnesses must be known to the public, so they can’t be simply friends or members of your family. In fact, relatives are not allowed to act as witnesses to a Guinness world record. The best witnesses are usually people who work for the city or government, such as policemen, judges, or leaders. The witnesses must read the Guinness rules before the attempt is made, and then write and sign their statements. Second, you must be able to prove that you broke the record in some other way, usually by sending in an article about the attempt from the local newspaper. It’s also important to take pictures of the record attempt and film it if possible. If you want to break a record, the most important thing to remember is to ask for the rules before you do anything. The Guinness Book of World Records has rules for all sorts of attempts, and you will need to know exactly what you should and shouldn’t do. The editors at Guinness can also help you by giving you the latest information about a certain record. If you are trying to break an existing record, you need to know if the record has already been broken. If you are trying to set a new type of record, you need to find out if the editors will accept it. If the record is dangerous, you must know about strict safety rules and follow them. There are many strange records in the Guinness Book of World Records, but the editors will not allow any records that are very dangerous.
Part 2
Even if you do set a new record, it isn’t sure that your record will be included in the book. There are a few basic rules for Guinness records. First, officials must be able to measure the record. Second, as mentioned before, independent witnesses must observe the record and send in a statement. Third, a record must be objective. That means that a record such as “most beautiful girl” or “best friend” won’t be accepted. A record should also be interesting to as many people as possible. Records that have to do with things that happen only once, such as “the first…,” won’t end up in the book. It is also important that the editors can make rules so that anyone who wants to try to break the record will have a fair chance. If these basic rules are met, the record will be accepted as a Guinness world record. However, a record won’t appear in the book unless it is chosen by the editors. The editors of the Guinness Book of World Records have to make many difficult decisions. People are very creative and send in all kinds of exciting records. It isn’t always easy to choose the right ones for the book. The book is read by people all over the world, and the editors must select records that represent the spirit of the Guinness Book of World Records-that is, amazing feats and achievements that show just how wonderful the world of world records is!
Unit2
LISTENING TEXT
H: Henry M: Mike, an elephant hunter
H: Mike, what was it that you heard about my brother’s journey?
M: I heard that he went looking for Solomon’s Mines.
H: Solomon’s Mines? Where are they?
M: I don’t know. I know where they’re said to be.
H: Tell me, please!
M: Well, South African elephant hunters usually don’t care much for the life and culture of native blacks. But sometimes you meet a man who takes the trouble to listen to them, and understand the history of this dark land. It was such a man who first told me the story of Solomon’s Mines, now thirty years ago. His name was Brown. I listened carefully to him, for I was young at the time, and this story of an ancient civilisation and its treasures took a great hold upon my imagination. He asked me whether I’d ever heard of the Suliman Mountains up in the northwest of the country. He said that that’s where Solomon really had his mines, his diamond mines. I asked him how he knew that. He answered that an old witch had told him all about it. She said that there were great wizards among the people who lived across those mountains. The wizards had learnt what they knew from white men a long time ago. They also had the secret of a wonderful mine of “bright stones”.
H: So did you go and look for that place?
M: No, I didn’t. I laughed at this story at the time, but I didn’t forget it. Twenty years later I heard something more about it from a man passing through. When he left he said that if we would ever meet again he would be the richest man in the world. One evening, while sitting in front of my tent, I saw a figure, apparently that of a European, for it wore a coat, coming out of the desert. The figure crept along on its hands and knees, then it got up and walked a few yards on its legs, only to fall and crawl again. Who do you suppose it turned out to be?
H: That man, of course.
M: Yes, or rather his skeleton and a little skin.
“Water! please, water!”he begged.
I gave him water with a little milk in it, and then he fell asleep. He had a fever and in his dreams he talked about Suliman’s Mountains, the diamonds, and the desert. “There it is!”he cried, pointing with his long, thin arm, “But I shall never reach it, never. No one will ever reach it!”
Unit 3
Listening text
Part 1
(Woman, Australian accent)
Bush fire
An Australian woman is talking on a radio programme about her escape from the bushfires near Sydney in 1994.
The first thing I did when I woke up in the morning was to watch the TV news. I could see that the situation was bad, and they showed a map where the fires were. Outside in the garden I couldn’t see the sun, as the sky was full of smoke.
I decided I’d better prepare to leave. My daughters were staying in town and my husband was abroad, so it was up to me to decide what to do. I packed a suitcase of clothes and another case of useful things. It’s difficult in this kind of situation to know what to take with you. So, I took my passport and my bankbook and all the money I had. I took also my diary, my address book and my camera. Finally I took our wedding photographs, as I didn’t want to lose those.
Out in the garden the sky was getting blacker, and the wind which had been blowing hard for two days was getting stronger. I could now hear the sound of the fire which was only a mile or two away. I was expecting the police to drive by and warn people. Suddenly I noticed little pieces of burning wood falling out of the sky. They landed on the ground and started to burn the grass. I didn’t wait a moment longer. I got into my car and drove down the road. The smoke was thick and at times it was difficult to see the road. Animals were running across the road, trying to escape the fire. There were dogs, a few horses, and lots of kangaroos. Five miles down the road I came to a long bridge over the river. Once on the other side, I knew I was safe.
Part 2
(A = Radio announcer; male or female, Australian accent)
A: Good morning, listeners. Still hot and dry today and we would like to remind you that people in the following areas may need to leave their homes: Green Hill, Jonestown, and Wesley. The fire is still burning and we advise you to stay tuned for more information. You may have to leave the area if the winds change, so please take the following actions:
If you have a car, check that it is working properly and park it where you can easily get to it. Close all doors, roll up the windows, and leave the keys in the car. Put emergency supplies in the car. You will need water, some food, a first-aid kit, a radio and a flashlight. Put important documents, such as your bankbooks and passports, in a plastic bag.
Make sure that you are wearing good clothes. Put on heavy shoes, long pants, a long-sleeved shirt and gloves. Bring a towel that you can use to protect your face.
Call a friend or relative who lives in a safe area and ask if you can stay with them.
Close all windows and doors in your house and remove the curtains.
Turn off the gas.
Fill buckets, bathtubs, and other containers with water.
If you are asked to leave the house, you must do so immediately. Bring only what you need and tell someone when you leave and where you are going. Try to stay calm and listen to the radio for instructions. Choose a road that looks safe and keep an eye on the fire and the wind.
Unit 4
Listening text
G = Guide V = Visitor
V: Excuse me, can you tell us something about the history of Kew Gardens?
G: Botanical gardens have a long history in the UK, beginning with the foundation of the Oxford Botanical Garden in 1621. Kew Gardens was developed (built) in the 16th century. International importance came under the guidance of Sir Joseph Banks. He changed Kew from a royal collection of strange plants to a serious scientific research centre.
V: So what is the purpose of Kew Gardens today?
G: The motto forming the inspiration for Kew Gardens is simple but clear: “All life depends on plants.” The main purpose of Kew is to come to a better management of the earth’s environment. We try to do that by increasing knowledge and understanding of plants. After all, they form the basis of life on earth.
V: How can Kew Gardens reach this goal?
G: Kew wants to achieve this by:
developing a global collection of plants and show it to the public;
undertaking worldwide research into botany;
supporting the conservation of plants in the UK and overseas;
and informing and educating the wider public about Kew Gardens and their work.
V: If I may ask, what is there to see at Kew Gardens?
G: Kew has many plants in glasshouses and more than 20 different specialized gardens, such as the Rock Garden, Rose Garden, Woodland Garden and the Winter Garden.
V: I hear that they also have a Grass Garden. What can be interesting about that?
G: The Grass Garden shows a great number of different grasses. In economic sense, (Economically speaking) the grass family is one of the most important plant families. It provides most of our food, feeds our cattle and provides building materials such as bamboo and straw. Only three different bamboos are shown in the Grass Garden. More can be found in the Bamboo Garden. Over 120 species of bamboo planted there come from all over the world.
V: Well, I’m afraid that’s a bit boring for me. I think I’d have a look at the Rose Garden.
G: Of course, the Rose Garden attracts most visitors. It has 54 rose beds, each containing a different variety of rose. The roses are all arranged by the colour of their flowers. Shades of red are closest to the Palm House, while the lighter-coloured roses, such as the white and yellow ones, are planted near the edge of the garden.
Unit 5
Listening text
Part 1
Harry, Jenny, and Brian are discussing their advertisement plans for a new product.
H = Harry; J = Jenny; B = Brian
H: So, how much money have we got to spend?
B: Seven hundred and fifty thousand pounds. Jenny, what do you suggest?
J: I suggest that we use mainly TV, cinema, and print.
B: I see, magazines and newspapers. Can you give us your reasons?
J: Sure. First, our product looks good. So it would be a waste of money to use radio. Second, our product moves well, and it moves fast. So I want people to see it on the roads in our ads, going through the hills, that kind of thing.
B: What about advertising boards?
J: No. I prefer magazines and newspapers, and we haven’t got the money to do all three. So people will see the ad on TV and in the cinema. Then they’ll be able to read about it when they’re sitting down, reading their newspapers and magazines.
H: I get the idea. Then customers can read the detailed product information and check the prices.
J: Exactly.
H: So no advertising boards. When do you want the advertising to start, Brian?
B: May the 1st. That gives us three months to run to August 1st when most people like to buy their new cars.
J: I see. So we’re talking about three months. And have you thought of a headline?
H: What about this one: “The new Century 505 - the car you always promised yourself”?
Part 2
Four people in an advertising firm are discussing a future advertising programme.
B= Bob
A: OK. Our plan is to produce an advertisement for this computer which is made by one of China’s biggest computer producers, FFQ Computer Corporation. Any ideas?
B: I think it would be a good idea to have comments from people who are already using it. They can express their satisfaction with the product.
C: Well, maybe that’s not such a good idea. Do you think managers want to read what users think about a new piece of office equipment?
D: I agree with Bob. I think we should have a picture of the computer and give a description of the product.
B: I’m afraid I can’t agree with you. That’s a good way of giving information, but it’s not a good way of persuading people. For one thing, it’s boring, and people aren’t going to read an ad that looks boring. For another thing, one computer looks very like another. People aren’t going to remember the name of the product.
A: So what exactly are you suggesting?
B: I suggest that we ask users of this machine what they think about it. We can photograph them using it too. Then we can put their comments at the top of the advertisement in big print. We can bring in some humour too. People enjoy reading humorous ads.
D: The disadvantage with carrying out interviews is that it may take a long time. No problem, we can do some telephone and email interviews with our users.
C: How can we find out who are using these computers?
A: Easy. I’ll ask the company for a list of recent customers.
Unit 6
LISTENING TEXT
R = Reporter O = Mrs Ouyang
Mrs Ouyang runs a little restaurant in southern Yunnan. Five years ago she lost everything in an earthquake. Listen to her experiences and how the restaurant was rebuilt.
R: Mrs Ouyang, five years ago a heavy earthquake struck this area and destroyed almost all buildings in this village. The earthquake also hit your house badly. Can you tell us what happened?
O: In two weeks’ time it will be exactly five years ago that the earthquake destroyed our village. My husband and I had been running a restaurant for several years. Before that, he had worked as a taxi driver. All his savings had gone into the restaurant, and on that terrible day everything was destroyed. My husband was killed in the second shake. He shouldn’t have gone back into the restaurant. It was a stupid thing to do, but he thought he would have enough time to save a few important things.
R: What happened in the weeks after the quake and how did you get over it?
O: I moved to a nearby village with my sister. The death of my husband was of course the worst thing. I cried for many days. I wished I had died in his place. I lost all hope of a happy life.
R: What made you decide to reopen the restaurant?
O: There were two reasons. First of all, I had to make a living. But more important, I did it to honour my husband. The restaurant had been his great achievement. I felt there was no better way to remember him than by reopening the restaurant and continuing the business.
R: Was it easy to reopen the restaurant?
O: No, it wasn’t. My friends and relatives put some money together, a total of about 30,000 yuan. I received 8,000 yuan of financial aid from the local government and 25,000 from a foreign disaster relief organisation. I was also able to take out a loan of 50,000 from the bank. With the money and all the help I got, I opened the restaurant on the same location where our old one had been.
R: Do you often think about the disaster?
O: Yes, I do. I thought the earthquake was the day my life ended, even though I had not lost my life. But look here, I managed. I did not know I had the strength to pull through.
Unit 7
LISTENING TEXT
S = Cook O = Oliver B = Mr Bumble
Nine-year-old Oliver lives in a workhouse where the boys are given three meals of thin porridge a day, with an onion twice a week, and half a roll on Sundays. The workhouse is run by Mr Bumble, the headmaster. The room in which the boys are fed, is a large stone hall. The cook, assisted by one or two women, uses a big spoon to pour the porridge into the bowls. One spoonful, and no more -- except on holidays, when two spoonfuls and a piece of bread are given.
The bowls never need to be washed. The boys clean them with their spoons till they shine again, and when they have performed this operation, which never takes very long, the spoons being almost as large as the bowls, they sit staring at the cook. Boys usually have good appetites. Oliver Twist and his companions suffered this slow starvation for three months. At last they got so wild with hunger, that one boy, who was tall for his age, said to his companions, that unless he had another bowl of porridge per day, he was afraid he might some night eat the boy sleeping next to him. He had a wild, hungry eye; and they all believed him. The boys hold a meeting, casting lots who should walk up to the cook after supper that evening, and ask for more. The lot falls to Oliver Twist.
The evening arrived; the boys took their seats. The cook served the porridge, and the boys prayed. The porridge was eaten, and the boys whisper to each other, and nod at Oliver, while his next neighbours push him. Child as he is, he is desperate with hunger, and feels miserable. He rises from the table and advancing to the cook, bowl and spoon in hand, he says:
O: Please, sir, I want some more.
C: What!
O: Please, sir, I want some more.
The cook was a fat, healthy man; but he turned very pale. Amazed, he stares at Oliver before aiming a blow at his head with the large spoon and screaming for the headmaster.
C: Mr. Bumble, I beg your pardon, sir! Oliver Twist has asked for more!
B: For MORE! Calm down, sir, and answer me clearly. Do I understand that he asked for more, after he had eaten his supper?
C: He did, sir.
B: That boy will be hung. I know that boy will be hung. I was never more convinced of anything in my life, than that that boy will come to be hung.
Unit 8
Listening text
1 Part 1
(Female; since this is supposed to be a Chinese student, I suggest that we use a Chinese person who speaks English well.)
A: I am an International Business major at a Finance and Economics University. My major courses focus on international trade and finance, but English is also very important. Many of the textbooks we use are in English and some of our courses are taught in English, either by Chinese professors or visiting foreign teachers. At first, it was very difficult to understand what the teachers were saying. We take most of our courses here in China, but we also have the opportunity to study abroad for one year. Our university cooperates with universities in Europe, New Zealand, and the USA. I would like to study in Europe, perhaps in Germany or France, because I believe that the European Union will be an important business partner for China in the future. If I study in Germany or France, I can also learn a third language, which would be very useful.
The most difficult thing, in my opinion, is to understand all the technical terms. I was pretty good at English in middle school, but we only learned everyday English. Now I have to read long articles and textbook chapters that deal with difficult issues. Some of the words are only used in business, so most dictionaries don’t explain what they mean. I sometimes fell as if I had two majors-English and business. First I have to understand what the terms mean in Chinese, then learn the English words for them. Still, I like my major and I think that it will help me find a good job. My dream is to work in a Chinese import and export company and travel around the world.
2 Part 2
(Male; since this is supposed to be a Chinese student, I suggest that we use a Chinese person who speaks English well.)
B: Before I went to college, I thought that university life would be fun and easy. My friends told me that we would have lots of fun once we passed the entrance exam. If anyone ever says that to me again, I will let them know how wrong they are! Sure, it’s fun to be a university student, but it is also hard work. We have a lot of homework, and we have to write many papers and essays. I’m an English major, so most of my courses are about English. The first two years, the courses were similar to studying in middle school. We learnt more grammar and vocabulary, but we also had spoken English classes. In my junior year, I began studying other courses. I chose Linguistics because I am interested in languages, and I also took a few non-major courses. I like English best, but I know that I also need to learn more about other subjects.
Studying a language in college is different from studying other subjects. It is difficult to improve, so you have to spend a lot of time on reading, writing, and speaking. You almost have to “live in English,” that is, you have to use English all the time, not just in class. Our university offers a lot of help: there are many books, DVDs, and tapes that we can borrow, and there are different activities that help us practice our English, such as debate competitions, the university radio station, and conferences and meetings. I decided to become a teaching assistant for one of my foreign teachers. As a teaching assistant, I meet with a small group of freshman students every week. The meeting is their homework for their speaking class, and my job is to lead the discussion and help the students with their English. It is a wonderful way to practice my English-you learn a lot when you have to help others-and I enjoy making friends with students from other majors.
Unit 9
Listening text
Part 1
In , the World Health Organisation, WHO, warned of a possible outbreak of another serious disease which may be even more deadly than SARS. The WHO believes that it is likely that bird flu will spread to human beings in the next few years. If it does, up to seven million (see note 1)people could die from the disease.
Diseases like bird flu are caused by viruses, that is, tiny things which change and become more dangerous over time. When a new type of a common virus changes, it may be able to get past the body’s immune system. If that happens, humans are in great danger until a cure or treatment becomes available.
There have always been viruses and people have always gotten sick, of course, but as we saw with (???What’s your question? As explained in the next sentence, SARS spread very quickly etc.) SARS, the situation is more difficult today. People travel more than ever before, which means that the diseases can spread quickly and across large areas - in fact the whole world.
Scientists are already working on drugs that will prevent or limit the effect of a new virus, but the process takes time. It is just as important to make sure that countries, especially poor countries, are prepared to deal with the disease. New diseases usually affect poor areas the most, so we must help develop health care in all countries.
One reason for the WHO warning is that big new diseases tend to happen regularly, usually every 20 to 30 years. In the 20th century, there have been three large outbreaks: the Spanish flu in 1918-19, which killed between 20 and 40 million people(note 2); the Asian flu of 1957, killing one million (note 4) people; and the 1968 Hong Kong flu, which killed about 750,000 people (note 3). It has been 36 years since the Hong Kong flu, so scientists and doctors think that the next deadly challenge is just around the corner.
Part 2
There are three kinds of viruses that cause flu: A, B, and C. Type A is the virus that causes bird flu. As the name suggests, the virus is usually found in birds. It can also infect humans, pigs, horses and other animals. There are several different kinds of the Type A virus. (Only Type A has several kinds? Yes. Only type A has “subtypes,” but both B and C are “groups” of viruses. If you think it is confusing, or unnecessary, you can delete the stc. Influenza Type B Unlike influenza A viruses, these viruses are not classified according to subtype. Influenza Type C These viruses are not classified according to subtype.) Type B viruses are usually found only in human beings. They have been responsible for some flu outbreaks, but they are not considered as dangerous as Type A viruses. Type C viruses are not considered very serious. They are found in humans, but do not cause serious illnesses.
The most dangerous thing about the flu viruses is that they change. When humans are infected with a virus, the body develops a defense for it. If viruses didn’t change, we would not have the worry about the viruses we know. Unfortunately, every new generation of virus is slightly different from the older ones. That means that our body doesn’t recognise the virus and can’t protect itself from it. This kind of change is not very fast and doctors and scientists can change the medicines we use to help prevent the virus from causing serious illness.
The other kind of change, however, happens very quickly and is more serious. If a virus changes in this way and becomes a new type of virus, the body is defenceless. The virus can spread easily from one person to another and reach far across the world. Fortunately, this kind of change doesn’t happen very often.
The WHO now believes that a new, dangerous virus will appear soon and that we must prepare the best we can. We must improve health care in all countries and cooperate with each other so that we can discover and prevent new viruses.
Unit 10
Listening text
G: Welcome to the Mark Twain House and Museum. Mark Twain is America’s most famous writer. Do you know any books written by Twain?
S1: Ehm, The Adventures of Tom Sawyer and eh, the Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.
G: Yes, very good. Twain wrote these books while he lived in this house. He loved the house because it reminded him of his youth, and from the window he could hear the sounds of his own children and their friends playing on the banks of the river.
M: Is the house still the way it was when Twain lived here?
G: Yes. The house has been restored to the way it was when Twain lived here, between 1881 and 1891.
M: How long will the tour take?
G: The tour takes about two hours, and the group must stay together. Please, don’t touch anything.
M: Oh, can you make it a bit shorter? I don’t think the kids will stay quiet for such a long time.
G: Fine. Entering the house from the south, we are now in the hall. Immediately on the right is the drawing room, a rather formal room, where Twain received guests. The door on the left leads to the guest bedroom. The two doors in front lead to the rooms on the north side of the house: the dining room through the door on the right, and the library through the door on the left. Let’s first take a look in the library.
S2: I think I don’t want to see the library.
M: Shut up, Dave.
G: As you can see, the room called the library does not very much look like a library as we know it. The library is one of the nicest rooms in the house. Here, Twain recited poetry or read aloud stories to his family and friends.
S1: Look, they’ve got greenhouse.
G: Yes. The small room on the west side, off the library was filled with large, green plants. Twain’s daughters called it The Jungle. From the library, we can pass on to the dining room. Twain and his family had most of their meals here. The kitchen is located off the dining room, to the north.
M: Can we have a look at the kitchen, please?
G: I’m afraid the kitchen is closed to the public until the summer of next year.
M: Oh, what a pity.
G: Let’s go and have a look upstairs.
M: I think the children are getting tired. What is there to be seen upstairs?
G: The second floor has three bedrooms, another guest room and the schoolroom. The third floor has a servants’ room, a guest room and the largest of the rooms, where Twain wrote his books.
M: Shall we go upstairs?
S1: I want to go to the bathroom.
G: You can have a look at the bathroom on the second floor.
S1: Can we use it?
G: I’m afraid not.
M: Shall, we just go and have a look at the school room then?
S2: No, thanks. I want to go home.
M: Well, OK then. Let’s visit the museum shop. Then you can go to the toilet, and we can eat an ice-cream before we go home.
Unit 11
LISTENING TEXT
Dialogue 1
T: Teacher J: Jeff
T: Take a seat, Jeff. What can I do for you?
J: Well, I’d like to have another talk with you about my career choices.
T: If I’m remembering well (not wrong), you are going to be a sales assistant, right?
J: Yeah, well. I’ve changed my mind again. I want to become a vet. I really like working with animals.
T: Oh, but that’s quite a big change from what we talked about last time. Are you sure about this?
J: Yes. I think working as a vet I can earn much better wages.
T: But Jeff, look here. You aren’t that good at maths, and last time you said going to college was not for you. How will you be able to do that? (The purple parts seem to be not closely related to becoming a vet?)
J: I will work very hard.
T: Listen, Jeff. This may be a disappointment, but I think this is not a good idea. I know it sounds good, but it requires many years of study to become a vet. I’m not sure whether you can manage that. Think it over, will you?
Dialogue 2
L: Lizzy M: Ma Lin
L: Hi, Helen. How are you doing? It’s only a few more months.
M: A few more months? What do you mean, Lizzy?
L: The exams, of course! Aren’t you getting nervous?
M: Nervous, why?
L: Well, don’t you think it’s all (they’re) important?
M: It’s ( They’re) important, but why should I worry? I think I’ve always been quite a good student, so I think (delete this?) I have nothing to fear.
L: Quite good is not good enough, you know. If you want to go to Peking University, you’ve got to come out first.
M: I don’t want to go to Peking University. I want to go to a local university, here in our own province.
L: How can you say that? You’ve got to try your best.
M: I will, but I’ve already made up my mind. I don’t want to live in a big city far from home. Even if I get a top score, I will stay here. You know, studying at a local university you’ll have less competition and better chances of graduating as the No 1. (more opportunities)
Unit 12
Listening text
Part 1
Conversation at a private education institute between Julian (J) and a female teacher (T)
J: Good morning, I saw your advertisement in the paper for Chinese courses and I dropped by to get some more information.
T: Great, which course are you interested in -General Chinese or Business Chinese?
J: Well, I’m not sure, what’s the difference between them?
T: The General Chinese course is for beginners. It covers everyday situations – you know, shopping, booking tickets, ordering food in a restaurant, things like that. It’s very popular with people intending to visit China for a holiday.
J: I see, so is it mainly Chinese conversation, or does it include learning to read and write as well?
T: It mainly deals with spoken Chinese for beginners, but students do learn to recognise about 300 characters – enough to read simple passages.
J: Mmm, and the Business Chinese course?
T: That’s a more intense course for people who need to use Chinese for business situations (delete “situations”?). Most of the students work for corporations who have projects in China. It teaches a specialised vocabulary that’s used in meetings, reports, letters and so on. There’s a lot of speaking practice in this course too, but it places more stress on developing reading and writing skills than the General Chinese course.
J: Is it suitable for beginners?
T: Well, some beginners do choose this course, but they find the workload quite tough. I suggest you take the General Chinese course first because most students find it helps them to have a basic knowledge of the language.
J: I see. And what about the cost? . . . [fade out]
Part 2
Professor Smith is giving an informal presentation to a group of students aged about 17 or 18.
Hello everyone, thanks for coming. Well, we all know that exams are stressful and cause anxiety. Today, I’m going to explain what happens to your body when you feel anxious, and then give you some advice that might be helpful to you.
To start with, it’s important to understand that anxiety is a normal, natural response to stress or fear, and in fact it’s quite useful. Anxiety causes physical changes which prepare your body and mind to face challenges. So feeling anxious about an exam is okay and actually helps you to perform well.
Anxiety becomes a problem, however, if you experience it too frequently or over a long period of time. In this situation, it becomes difficult to concentrate and you may find you get upset easily or lose confidence. It’s also common to suffer from extreme tiredness and to have difficulty sleeping.
Now, I recommend a 3-step approach to beat anxiety: Firstly, use breathing exercises to reduce your body’s physical stress. Secondly, use positive thinking methods to calm your mind and improve your concentration, and thirdly, plan your study schedule using the “Eating an Elephant” approach.
[titters and ‘eating an elephant?’ from audience]
What do I mean? Well, if I asked you to eat an elephant, you’d probably feel you couldn’t do it. You’d start to worry, feel stressed and experience anxiety. But if I gave you an elephant steak – say, about this size – could you eat it?
[murmers of agreement and ‘yes’ from audience]
Yes, so eating an elephant is easy if you cut it into smaller pieces and just eat one piece at a time. And when you study you should “cut up” your workload into small pieces and concentrate on one piece at a time, rather than the “whole elephant”.
Ok, let’s look at each of the 3 steps in more detail . . .[fade out]
Unit 13
Listening text
Dialogue 1 Two teenage girls
J: Julie L: Lucy
L: Hi Julie, Oh no! Aren’t you ready yet? You know, Colin will be offended if we’re not on time.
J: Sorry, but I can’t make up my mind what to wear. What do you think – this or the dress?
L: Well, the blue skirt and pink blouse are very pretty, but I think your red dress is better for a party, it’s more elegant.
J: Right, the red dress it is, have a seat, I’ll only be 5 minutes.(Can we say so?) Its quite common in informal speech
L: Ok, but be quick . . .Oh what a lovely necklace!
J: Thanks, my grandmother gave it to me, and before that it belonged to her mother. It’s over a hundred years old.
L: Really? But the way it shines it looks like new!
J: That’s because it’s a real diamond, don’t you know that diamonds last for ever, they never look old!
L: I didn’t know that th (???) … Look lets go, and you can tell me about it on the way, it’ll be embarrassing if we’re the last to arrive.
Dialogue 2 Two teenage boys
D: Hello Alan, what’s that you’re reading?
A: It’s called The Woman in White.
D: Oh, that’s a novel by Wilkie Collins isn’t it; we’ve been reading about the Moonstone in class. Is the Woman in White a detective story too?
A: Well sort of, but in this story the person who investigates is not a policeman like Sergeant Cuff, he’s an art teacher.
D: What is it about?
A: Well, I haven’t finished yet, but at the beginning of the book the art teacher meets a mysterious woman dressed in white while he is out walking one night. It turns out that the Woman in White looks very similar to his student – Laura - so he tries to find out more about her. He discovers that the man Laura has just married knows the Woman in White and is responsible for some terrible things that happened to her. It seems that Laura’s husband is a very wicked man.
D: Sounds exciting!
A: Yes, I hope the art teacher finds out the truth before Laura’s husband does anything bad to her.
D: Mmm, can I borrow it after you finish it?
A: Sure, it may take me a while though, because it is in English and I have to read slowly.
Unit 14
Listening text
Part 1
A bee-keeper talks about collecting honey from bees.
Once upon a time, bee-keepers killed their bees every autumn. Why? You may ask. Well, the answer is this. To get some honey, bee-keepers and farmers used to put out small wooden boxes in a corner of the farmyard. Bees would come and fill the box with honeycomb. However, there was no way of getting the honey out without killing the bees. So they used to burn a chemical close to the box in order to kill the bees and then take the honey.
Now, bee-keepers use beehives to collect honey. In the beehive there are a number of wooden squares with spaces between them which can be lifted out. In late summer, the squares, which are now full of honeycomb, are lifted out. The squares are put in a special machine and turned round and round very fast for several minutes. Turning the squares round and round like this forces out the honey. The honey is then collected and poured into jars. After that, the empty squares are returned to the hive for the bees to fill with honey the following year.
Bees need food to live through the winter. That’s why they make honey. Bee-keepers can do one of two things. Either they can leave some of the honey in the hive for the bees to eat during the winter. Or else they can remove all the honey and provide the bees with a mixture of sugar and water for the bees to eat instead.
Part 2
J : James, a birdwatcher, R: Reporter
(Forrest sounds and birdsong in the background)
R: Welcome to Poyang Lake in northeastern Jiangxi. We are here with a group of people who have come to look at the famous white cranes that nest here every year. Before we talk more about the cranes, we will ask James, one of the birdwatchers, to tell us about his hobby. Hello, James.
J: Hello. It’s a beautiful morning, isn’t it?
R: Yes, it is. James, you have been a birdwatcher for many years. What made you choose this hobby?
J: Well, I’ve always loved the outdoors. When I was a child, my mother would always tell me about the birds we saw. I wanted to learn about the birds, too. This hobby is a great way to combine travel, learning, and exercise.
R: Why are you here in Jiangxi today?
J: As you know, Poyang Lake is the largest freshwater lake in China. There are some 116 species of birds that coming Poyang Lake in winter. After spending the winter here, they return home. It’s a paradise for birdwatchers!
R: Why do the birds choose this place?
J: Well, it’s warm here, and there’s lots of water and food.
R: So this must be a very important place for the birds?
J: Yes, it is. The government has made laws to protect the birds and to make sure that this remains a
safe place for birds in winter.
R: Many of us know that the famous white crane comes to Poyang Lake in winter. What can you tell us about the white crane?
J: It’s one of the fifteen species of crane in the world. China is home to eight or nine of the species, including some rare and very beautiful cranes like the white crane. It is one of the most endangered crane species, and we must do what we can to protect it. The white crane divides its time between Russia and China, and Poyang Lake is one of the most important places for them.
R: Thank you. Now let’s go look at the birds!
Unit 15
Listening text
X: Xiaoyi – young adult female radio presenter *
J: Jiawei – young adult male radio presenter *
C: Chen Yu – a male middle school student*
L: Liu Yue – a female middle school student*
Part 1
J: Hi, it’s Sunday, 20 past four and it’s time for 16:20, the weekly youth culture programme for young adults presented by young adults. I’m Jiawei . . .
X: And I’m Xiaoyi. Welcome to 16:20.
J: We hope you are having a good weekend. We’ve got a great programme for you today, so sit back for the next two hours and enjoy!
X: Yes, indeed. We’ll be reporting on spring fashions, including all the latest trends that appeared in the Shanghai Fashion Week. And then it’s Jiawei’s regular “Sports Round Up” when he’ll be bringing you all the news from the world of sport.
J: Yup, and this week I’ll be taking a special look at winter sports and talking to Wang Lei, China’s top snowboarder.
X: All right! You know, I really want to try snowboarding sometimes. Now, don’t forget that at 5:50 it’s “Sounding Off’, when you can phone in and tell us what you think about a current issue. Today we’ll be discussing the Internet and young people. There’s been a lot of talk recently about kids spending too much time on-line, and even becoming addicted to some games. We want to hear your views, so give us a call on 5628 3131.
J: Yeah, how can we solve this problem? Let’s hear your suggestions - the phone lines are open. That’s 5628 3131. But right now, let’s have some music. It’s time for “Listener’s Choice”.
Part 2
J: Listener’s Choice is your chance to hear the music you wanna listen to. So send us your requests.
X: First up is a request from two students at No 3 Middle School in Nanchang: Chen Yu and Liu Yue wrote to us saying . . .[reading] “ Please play something by the 12 Girls Band. We think the girls are great, and we really like the way they are mixing traditional sounds with pop music.” Thanks for your email guys, we totally agree with you.
J: We certainly do. For anyone listening who doesn’t know, the 12 Girls Band is a group of 12 young - and very beautiful - women who are using traditional musical instruments in a new way. Their music is a mixture of old and modern styles.
X: Isn’t it great that this is a type of music that all the family can enjoy together, from the very young to the elderly!
J: In fact Xiaoyi, it’s a type of music that people all over the world are enjoying together. The 12 Girls Band is so popular in Japan that all the tickets for 32 concerts were sold in just 10 minutes!
X: Wow, so what have you got for us to listen to?
J: Well, I’ve been listening to their album “Eastern Energy”. It’s a fantastic CD, with so many great tracks, but I finally decided on the 12 Girls Band’s cover version of a hit song by the British group “Coldplay”. It’s called “ Clocks”.
X: OK then. For Chen Yu and Liu Yue and everyone at No 3 Middle school in Nanchang. Here is “Clocks” from the 12 Girls Band’s album “Eastern Energy” . . .
[Musical extract from the start of track “Clocks”, Eastern Energy album, 12 Girls Band]
Unit 16
Listening text
Extracts from a presentation given by a female careers advisor.
Part 1
So, you’ve seen a job you want. You sent in your application and now you have been invited for an interview. What should you do and say to make your interview a success?
Well, first of all, consider the way you present yourself. When we meet someone for the first time, we get an instant impression about what type of person he / she is. This happens in the first five minutes, and once we have decided, we don’t usually change our opinion. So when an employer meets an applicant for a job, those first five minutes are vital.
To make a good impression, you need to pay attention to two things: the way you look and your body language.
Appearance is very important, so think carefully about what to wear. This will depend on the type of job you are applying for, but as a general rule, I’d recommend that men should wear a tie. I think it’s best to avoid jeans and casual trousers; they might make some employers think you also have a “casual” attitude towards work. Women, please don’t wear short skirts or anything too tight, and don’t choose anything that is too decorated – keep it simple.
Decide what you are going to wear a few days before the interview. This will give you time to check your clothes and make sure there are no stains on them or buttons missing.
Remember the “look” you are aiming for is neat, clean and tidy. And if you look good, you will feel confident.
Part 2
Now a few tips on body language.
Two very important things that will happen in the first five minutes of your interview are the handshake and eye contact. Both of these are important if you are to make a good impression.
You should look the employer straight in the eye as soon as you enter the room, give him or her a friendly smile and shake hands firmly. (Some people think a weak handshake shows a weak personality, so do give a nice firm grasp.)
Don’t sit down until invited, and then sit up straight and look interested. Leaning forward slightly when the interviewer is speaking is a good way of showing you are listening carefully, and don’t forget to keep as much eye contact as possible throughout the interview.
You will probably feel quite nervous about your interview – don’t worry, that’s completely natural. However, nervous tension can affect your body language. Please watch out for this. It is quite common that you move about in your chair and gesture with your hands a lot, so sit fairly still and hold your hands gently together in your lap if necessary.
One last hint: Our body language always shows when we aren’t telling the truth – our eyes and body move in different ways – and some interviewers are quite skilled in spotting this. A lot of us have a tendency to, er, expand the truth a bit when we want to get that great job, but believe me honesty really is the best policy!
篇8：3B Unit 20(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demand:
通过本单元教学，学生应能熟练地运用表达“有关订计划”的常用语；复习宾语从句；了解印度民族主义领袖甘地的生平和印度人民反抗殖民主义斗争的历史。
Importance and difficulty:
1. Words and expressions
Design, permit, think up , make a point , more than badly , throw off, lack , struggle
2. Sentences:
A. Even before India won independence from its British rulers, it was clear that Gandhi was the key figure and leader in the struggle of 380 million Indians to govern themselves.
B. He was a model of a different kind of political leader.
C. It was the duty of everyone to disobey this law, but without using violence.
D. On his return to India he had the chance to travel to South Africa to work on a law case.
3. Grammar
A. We elect him monitor of our class.
B. I ordered them to go away at once.
C. I can hear the girl singing.
D. We consider him to be a great leader.
4. Useful expressions
A. What do you plan to do?
B. Why do you think it is possible….?
C. I decided …..
D. I insist on….
E. I will…..
Unit 20 Lesson 77 Gandhi : His life
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ reading ability
2. Get the Ss know something about Gandhi’s life
Importance and difficulty:
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Develop the Ss’ reading skill.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and slides.
Teaching method: reading and understanding
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
( Listen to a tape <听力强化训练>page 5 )
T: Where did these voices come from?
------ Perhaps they were on a strike or they were gathering in a place to ask for sth.
T: What did they want to have ?
----- The blacks wanted to be equal as whites.
Apartheid means ( policy of ) racial segregation ( in South Africa ).
T: Once in South Africa, blacks were badly treated by South African whites. Blacks had not rights to vote. They were not allowed to take the buses or trains for whites. Do you think the blacks and whites are equal?
----- No. Of course not.
T: The blacks were lack of equality. And this is called the racial discrimination.
T: Do you any great leaders who led the black people to let them live a better life?
----- Lincoln , Martin Luther King , Gandhi ……
T: Who were they ?
T: Do you know anything about? Where was Gandhi born?
----- He was born in India.
T: India was once ruled by the British . It was Gandhi who led the Indians to govern themselves.
Today we are going to read Gandhi’s life.
Step 2. Reading for general understanding
I. Questions:
1. In which countries did Gandhi work for the liberation of Indians?
------- India and South Africa.
2. What successes did Gandhi gain?
------ He became a lawyer; he won a victory over the Pass Law in South Africa: he won a victory over the law that did not allow Indians to make salt: he won independence for India.
II. Find out what happened to Gandhi in the following years:
In 1869 Gandhi was born in India.
In 1882 Gandhi was married at the age of 13, following the local custom.
In 1888 He sailed to England in September 1888.
In 1891 Gandhi became a lawyer.
In 1915 Gandhi returned to India and was honoured as a hero.
In 1948 Gandhi died on January 30 th ,1948.
Step 3. Careful reading
1. Do the comprehension exercises ( WB and paper comprehension )
Reading comprehension for Unit 20 Lesson 77 (3B) CBBDD CAC
1. This text is about ___.
A. Gandhi’s political life B. Gandhi’s family life
C. Gandhi’s life D. Gandhi’s professional life
2. What custom is mentioned in the text?
A. Dining B.Marriage C.Family D.Education
3. Gandhi had traveled from ___ to India.
A. England, India and South Africa
B. India, England and South Africa
C. India, South Africa and England
D. South Africa, India and England
4. Gandhi was ___.
A. a lawyer
B. a leader for equal rights
C. a leader in the struggle of Indians to govern themselves
D. all of the above
5. Gandhi did not want his people to get equal rights trough ___.
A. articles B.publicity C.marches D.violent fights.
6. Gandhi was ___ when India won her independence.
A. over 80 B. over 60 C. over 70 D. over 65
7. Gandhi was shot by ___.
A. an Indian who was against his ideas
B. a white man who hated him
C. an Indian who was sent by the British government
D. a white spy from England
8. The two movements in paragraph 5 are actually ___ movements.
A. economic (经济的) B. cultural
C. political D. Educational
2. Note making
Step 4. Practice ( Wb )
Step 5. Interview
Homework
Lesson 78 Gandhi: His beliefs
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ reading ability
2. Get the Ss know something about Gandhi’s beliefs
Importance and difficulty:
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Develop the Ss’ reading skill.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and slides.
Teaching method: reading and understanding
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Questions:
1. Where was he born?
2. How old did he get married?
3. When and where did he go to study law? ---- In England in Sep. 1888.
4. Later he went to South Africa. Why did he go there?--- to work on a law case
5. How long did he stay there ? ---- 20 years
6. Did he do any writing at that time?
7. What did he write?------ He wrote about socialism in newspaper and started a magazine call “ Indian Opinion”.
8. When did he return to India? ---- 1915
9. What kind of things did he persuade Indian people to do?----- to be independent, to make their own cotton cloth to refuse to buy cloth made in England, to make their own salt
Step 2. Presentation
T: What do you think of Gandhi?
T: He was so great a man that all Indians respected him and he had become “father” to all Indians.
Step 3. Fast reading
Read the text fast and do the comprehension exercises:
1. text book ---Page 46 ( true or false )
2. reading comprehension
Reading comprehension for Unit 20 Lesson 78 I (3B) DCACB DCB
1. Gandhi was not ___.
A. a clever lawyer B. a determined fighter
C. a political leader D. a common leader
2. What drove Gandhi to struggle against all the unfairness?
A. His material desire.
B. His religious (宗教的)belief.
C. His belief in truth.
D. Other people’s expectations.
3. We can infer from the text that Gandhi seldom __.
A. lied B. talked with others
B. made mistakes D. praised himself
4. The first sentence in paragraph 2 means that ___.
A. he refused to be famous
B. he never made use of his position
C. he didn’t work for his personal interests
D. he liked to be a common person
5. Gandhi’s efforts for equality didn’t enable all Hindus to _____.
A. draw water from the same village well
B. be dressed the same
C. go to the same temple to pray
D. marry each other
6. Paragraph 5 talks about ___.
A. how Gandhi fought for the equality of women
B. how many unfair laws existed at that time
C. how people could escape from the punishment for their beliefs
D. how people should fight against unfair laws
7. The word “father” in paragraph 6 means ___.
A. all Indians became his sons
B. all Indians regarded him as their father
C. all Indians respected him
D. all Indians felt that he was above them
8. Einstein’s words mean ___.
A. Gandhi was only understood by few people
B. Gandhi was so great and outstanding that he can hardly be imagined
C. Future generations will not believe in his ideas
D. Gandhi could only be understood by the people of his times.
Reading comprehension II (Lesson 78) 3B ACDBC
1. Gandhi decided to live as a poor man because he ___.
A. did not have expensive tastes
B. valued ordinary people much
C. didn’t want to make money
D. believed in non-violence
2. What did Gandhi mean by “the force of truth”?
A. Great attention should be paid to the equality of women.
B. When people made mistakes he should admit them willingly.
C. Everyone should disobey the unfair law,, if any, but without using violence.
D. Everyone should be prepared to do heavy work , from leaders to the poorest peasants.
3. Which can be inferred from the 6th paragraph?
A. At that time the Indian burial customs were quite unusual.
B. Gandhi’s death aroused great unrest among the Indian people.
C. It seems quite ridiculous that he called for non-violent resistance , but was violently killed.
D. Gandhi was deeply loved and respected by his people, who showed great sorrow for his death.
4. What can be inferred from the last paragraph?
A. Future generations will no longer believe in his ideas.
B. His contributions to the world are so great that it’s beyond our imagination.
C. Albert Einstein thought nobody but himself really understood Gandhi.
D. Gandhi could only be understood by the pjeople of his times.
5. “The secret lies in the title of the book…” The underlined word refers to ___.
A. how he became such a successful political leader
B. how he got over so many failures or difficulties in his life
C. why he was regarded as a model of a different kind of political leader
D. why he entitled his book The Story of My Experiments with Truth
Questions
1. What did Gandhi mean by “ the force of truth ”?
---- If an unfair law existed, it was the duty of everyone to disobey this law, but without using violence.
2. Which event is described in the text?
----- The Indian customs following his death.
Step 4. Careful reading
Read it again and do the comprehension 3 ----Page 46
Describe the character of Gandhi using the information from the text
1. His simple life: He refused to make any personal gain from his political work. He decided to live as a poor man and not to possess wealth. When he travelled across India, he travelled “hard-seat, unreserved”, together with peasants and other ordinary people. In cities he refused to travel in a rickshaw. He ate simply and never ate meat. He rose early in the morning and worked at his wheel, making cotton thread.
2. His interests: Gandhi was interested in all spiritual matters, not only in the Indian gods. All his life he reached out for the truths of spirits and gods.
3. His belief: Gandhi believed that one should be able to “love the most ordinary being on earth as oneself”. Gandhi hated the custom that had divided Hindu society into separate groups for thousands of years and his goal was to end this.
Step 5. Practice
Workbook --- Ex 2
Homework
Lesson 77
Aims and demand: Grasp the usage of the language points
Step 1. Text reviewing
T: Where was Gandhi born? ----- India.
T: Following the Indian local custom, what age should one get married? ----- 13
T: That is to say. Gandhi got married at 13.
T: What age is the Chinese boy / girl usually married?
Do you want to know my age of marriage ? ----- That’s a secret.
What age are you going to get married?
1. marry sb.
be married
get married
be married to sb.
T: Try to guess : When did I get marred?
When did your parents get married?
How long has his / her parents been married?
What is your father? ---- a worker, a teacher……
Then his mother has been married to a worker for … years.
他们是战争结束时结婚的。
They got / were married at the end of the war.
---你和露西结婚多久了？--- 了。
--- How long have you been married to Lucy?
--- For twenty years.
T: Gandhi sailed to England to study law and stayed there for 3 years. As soon as he came back to India , what did he do?
----- On his return to India, he had the chance to travel to South Africa to work on a law case.
T: What is the first thing you will do on your arrival at home this Friday afternoon?
2. on one’s return …
on one’s arrival …
on the enterance …
on hearing …
on reaching…
他一到机场就听到了这个消息。
He heard the news on his arrival at the airport.
他一听到这个消息就赶回家。
On hearing the news , he hurried home.
老师一进来，学生就起立。
The Ss stood up on the entrance of the teacher. ( true )
……………… on entering the teacher. ( wrong )
3. work on = be engaged in sth.
work on = work continuously
我们正在制定一个新的旅行计划。
We are working on a new plan for travel.
他在实验室里一直工作到午夜。
He stayed in the lab and worked on till midnight.
He worked on in the lab until midnight.
T: What made him change his life?
--- The chance to travel to South Africa to work on a law case made him change his life.
This experience was to change his life.
4. “be + 不定式” 通常表示计划安排要做的事
I’m go meet him at the airport.
（本文）表示不可避免将要发生的（命中注定的事）
Worse was to come.-------( “Roots”) Page 8
还可表示命令（父母让子女做的事）
You are to do your homework before you watch TV.
T: This experience was the turning point in his life. Listen to the tape and deal with the following language points.
5. insist on doing
insist that
He insisted on going there alone.
He insisted that he should go there alone.
He insisted that he was right.
He insisted that he had finished his homework.
6. play an important role in…
play an important part in …
7. be put in prison
be thrown in prison
8. have a gift for …
9. think up 想出 ，编出 ( invent , make up )
think of （考虑）打算，想出，想到，想着，想起
think about （考虑）回想（过去）， 考虑某事是否可行
think over 仔细思考一遍
think of ……as 把……看作
Most of the masters thought of their slaves as animals that could be bought and sold.
Mary, are you thinking of marry Tom?
Who thought of/ up the plan?
We mustn’t think about your this matter any more.
I’ll think about your suggestion, and give you an answer tomorrow.( if it is possible )
Think over, and you’ll find a way.
10. with the purpose of 怀着……的目的
for the purpose of 为着……的目的
on purpose 有意地
11. following this 在。。。 之后
T: What will happen following the examination?
-----The result will come out.
T: What will happen following the heavy rain ?------ The river will be flooded.
Following the hot weather?----- Crops will die.
Step 2. Exercises
Correct the mistakes: ( Lesson 77)
1. Joan is going to marry with Hubert.
2. Gandhi was married at the age of 13, followed local custom.
3. Followed the doctor’s advice, my father has given up drinking.
4. The villagers still following the customs of their grandfathers.
5. In his return to India he had the chance to travel to South Africa.
6. In reaching the city he called up Mr. Smith .
7. After he returned home, he was honoured for a hero.
8. He had a gift in thinking up ways of making political points.
9. He was thrown off a train for insisting traveling in the whites-only section.
10. For twenty years he played important role in working for equal rights for Indians.
11. South Africa passed further laws were designed to make life difficult for non-whites.
12. Some of the Indians publicly burnt their permits and many of them were put in the prison.
13. Thousands of Indians, joined him when he led a march to the coast, on the purpose of “making a little salt.”
14. Follow this , 60,000 Indians , including Gandhi, were put in prison.
Lesson 78
Step 1. Deal with the language points
1. (translate) Gandhi was much more than a clever lawyer, a fine speaker, a determined fighter for human rights and a political leader.
甘地远不只是一位聪明的律师，优秀的演说家，坚定的人权战士和一位政治领导人。
他们俩远不只是同学，他们还是知心朋友。
Both of them are much more than schoolmates, they are close friends.
They were more than glad to help.
他们是极其乐意帮忙的。
This more than satisfied me.
这使我深感满意。
2. lie in 在于
T: He didn’t pass the exam, where did the problem lie?
Ss: It lies in his laziness.
(translate)那就是真正的危险所在。
That is where the real danger lies.
3. reach out for
他伸手从书架上取下一本书来。
He reached out for a book from the top of the shelf.
4. (translate ) One should be able to “love the most ordinary being on earth as oneself.”
“……就象爱自己一样去爱世界上最普通的人。”
being c生物（特指人）
a human being/ human beings
Men , women, and children are human beings.
All birds and animals are living beings.
on earth 在世界上，在人世间
in the world 。。。
他们认为自己是世界上最聪明的人。
They consider themselves the wisest men on earth.
北京将成为世界上最大的城市。
Beijing will become the largest city on earth in area.
5. take up arms
6. as follows 固定词组 “如下” 以引出下文
他们的建议如下：。。。
Their suggestions are as follows.
hardly
hard
There is hardly any wine in the bottle.
He hardly works at all.
He works hard at his lessons.
Such …as 象。。。这样的，诸如。。。这类
他曾经希望做一名象甘地那样的领袖。
He wished to be such a leader as Gandhi.
这样的照片应该由博物馆保存。
Such a picture / photo as this should be kept in museum.
Step 2. Exercises
Fill in the blanks with a correct word ( Lesson 77~78)
1. He was busy ____ his work and did not notice me come ____. with, in
2. We should take ___ arms and fight ___ the Japanese invaders. up , against
3. Alice Green has been married ____ John Smith ___ ten months. to for
4. Diligence leads ___ success and failure often lies ____ laziness. to in
5. He demanded an end ___ the British rule ____ India. to over
6. Please let me go on ___ my work __ peace. with in
7. He reached __ his pocket __ some money. Into for
8. ___ last the enemy had to give ___ and we won the battle. at in
9. ___ her return __ the office, she began to work. On to
10. The notice reads ___ follows. as
Choose the correct answer ( Grammar exercises for object complement ) Lesson 77~78
1. Jane devoted her life ___ the sick.
A. to caring for B. to care for C. to caring D. caring for
2. The mother wanted her son ___ without delay.
A. to operate B. to be operated on C. to operate on D. being operated on
3. The father forbade the child ___ out of doors during his absence.
A. to go B. go C. goes D. will go
4. She was glad to see her child____.
A. taking care of B. taken care C. taken care of D. take care of
5. When she returned home, she found the window open and something____.
A. stolen B. missed C. to be stolen D. to steal
6. Although he tried, Bob still couldn’t make himself ____ .
A. being heard B. hearing C. heard D. hear
7. We can depend on the workers ___ the plan.
A. carried B. to carry C. carry D. carrying
8. The government calls on us ____ our production.
A. increased B. increasing C. increase D. to increase
9. Do you hear someone ___ at the door?
A. knocked B. knocking C. to knock D. knock
10. Did you notice the boy ___ the street just now?
A. crossed B. to cross C. cross D. crossing
ABACA CBDBC
篇9：unit 13 The USA(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
一、教法建议
1. 目的与要求
这是一篇说明文。通过教学的每个环节实现以下三个目的：
（1）了解有关the USA , New York的一般情况，如：人口，历史，政府以及the bison等
（2）帮助学生学习掌握本单元的重点词汇和短语；
（3）在帮助学生提高阅读能力的同时，帮助指导学生如何运用英语介绍某一地区（城市或国家）的能力并能缩写课文（100-150 words ）.
本单元的能力目标：
a.理解课文大意，能回答有关问题；
b.能复述课文；
c.将课文改写成100-150 words短文；
（以上能力目标，a. 三会， b. 二会，c.一会。）
2. 本单元重点知识：
(1)单词和词组：tear v. turn v. rot vi. shoot n.
tear down ,turn away ,have an effect on
take the possession of ,a handful of ,give in ,
make an agreement with ,have trouble with ,
now that ,
(2)呈现与训练：
① tear : to break by pulling apart 撕开，撕裂
tear down :to destroy a building 拆毁（建筑）
Paper tears easily . 纸容易撕破。
She tore the table cloth in half . 她把那块桌布撕成两块。
The boy tore the letter open . 把…撕开
He tore the picture into pieces . 把…撕成碎片
John torn up his test paper so that his mother wouldn’t see his low grade . 撕碎
They tore the old building down in order to build a new one . 拆毁
② turn v. or link v.
turn是一个常用词，可以构成许多词组。如：
turn on / off / up /down (用于电流水的)
开 / 关 / 开大 / 开小
turn up : appear
The pop star didn’t turn up at the party . 出场
turn away (本单元为”to refuse to admit “)
从……赶走；拒绝（某人进入）（本义为“把……转开”）
The hotel porter turned away anybody who wasn’t wearing a collar and tie . 拒绝……进入
He turned up his coat collar to keep out the wind . 翻起
She turned away in horror at the sight of so much blood. 转身不看
I turned in bed all night ,I couldn’t sleep because of the heat . 辗转反侧
She turned the car into a narrow street (onto the highroad ). ……开进一条狭小街道（开上高速公路）
I found that the milk had turned sour . 变酸（link v. ）
The young soldier didn’t turn against his country ,instead he gave his life to his country . 背叛
Mary picked up a wallet on her way home and she turned it in to the teacher the next morning . 上交
The thief was turned over to the police. 移交
He is a good man you can turn to for help . 求助
这类词和词组很多，要学会读懂上下文的内容，准确理解，找到一个词组的本义，转义和喻义，这对扩大词汇量和提高阅读能力很有好处。
③ rot vi. : go bad corrupt 烂，腐败；Vt. 使……烂
Some apples rotted on the tree .
The wood of the stairs has rotted away in pieces .
④ shoot n. 幼芽，幼枝；
shoot vi. vt. 开枪，射中；
（shot作名词是“开枪，枪声”的意思）
There are a lot of new shoots on the tree .
The old man heard two shots walking through the woods.
The soldier fired a shot . ……开了一枪
The man shot at the bird ,but he didn’t shoot it .
那个人向着鸟开枪，但是没有射中
⑤ have an effect on 对……产生影响
Punishment will have a bad , but not a good effect on a child who does something wrong .
⑥ take the possession of 占有；夺取
⑦ a handful of 少量的
⑧ give in 屈服，让步
⑨ make an agreement with 与……达成协议
⑩ have trouble with 因苦恼；同……有矛盾
now that 既然
3. 本单元应掌握的难点知识：
（1）常见的主语形式：
一般说来，英语句子中的主语形式常见的有以下八种：
A bison is a large animal found on the American plains .（名词）
This is the room Mr Lu Sun once lived in .（代词）
She is a quick girl .（人称代词）
The old are taken good care for in their own family . （形容词）
Two times five is ten .（数词）
Fishing is interesting . （动名词）
To save money now is impossible to us students .（不定式短语）
What surprised me most was that it seemed to be a few days before a new house was set up . （主语从句）
以上有关主语八种形式需要在阅读和练习中熟记并掌握。
（2）主语和谓语的一致性问题
主语和谓语的一致性问题是大多数学生学习英语时遇到的最大的困难之一。一个句子中的谓语动词必须与这个句子中的主语人称，数的形式保持一致关系。例如，句子中的主语是单数形式，其谓语动词用单数形式。这种主谓一致的划分归纳起来有以下八种。
① 由and连接的名词作主语时
a. 如果由and连接的两个名词（不同概念）作主语时，谓语动词要用复数形式。如：
Tom and Jack live in Room 305.
Both you and I are to be sent to Tibet.
What he said and what he did agreed with each other.
b. 当and连接的两个名词指同一个人、同一件事或一概念，这时and后面的名词前没有冠词，其谓语动词用单数形式（这里and相当于as well as ）。如：
The singer and composer is coming to our school .
那位歌唱家兼作曲家将来我们学校。
Bread and butter is often served for breakfast in our dining hall .
（比较：The boy and the girl were given a book each .每个同学都分得一本书。其中 “each”是同位语，句中主语为复数。）
我们食堂早点经常供应奶油面包。
常见的由and连接的两个名词指由一个概念的形式有：the needle and thread针线，salt and water盐水，the or and knife刀叉，soap and water肥皂水，iron and steel钢铁等。
C. 由and连接的两个并列主语为单数概念。主语前面分别由each , every ,no等词来修饰时，其谓语动词为单数形式。
Each doctor and each nurse was sent for .
把所有的医生和护士都清来了。
Every boy and every girl is able to go to school in that village .
在那个村子里所有的孩子们都能上学。
注意：more than one和many a 修饰的单数名词后面的谓语用单数形式，但其意义是复数。
如：
More than one student is fond of folk- music .
许多学生喜欢民间音乐。
Many a boy enjoys playing foot-ball .
许多男同学喜欢踢足球。
② 当主语后面接说明主语的修饰词或插入语时，谓语动词的数不受修饰成份的影响，仍同主语的关系一致。
这些修饰成分常见的有：with, along with , togeth whit (和…一起)；as well as (还) ；like (像)；no less than (不亚于)；rather than (而不是)；more than（多于)；as much as (如…一般多)；but ,except（除了……）；besides (除了……还……)；including包括；in addition to（另外）等引导的一个修饰结构，放在主语后面。如：
The old man , along with his two grandsons, often have a walk in the evening .
Jenny , as well as her friends , is going abroad .
The house ,including the garden and the garage ,was sold out .
③ 当集合名词作主语时
根据句子内容，谓语动词可以是单数也可以是复数形式。在这一用法中，要注意正确判断主语是“整体”概念，还是“个体”概念。
如：# The whole nation regard Premier Zhou Enlai as one of the greatest leaders .
(句中 “nation” 表示“全国人民”谓语用复数)。
注: 集合名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数还是复数，取决于它强调的内容，如果一个名词作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数形式，表示“全体一致的行动”或者“群体关系”；当谓语动词表示“身份”、“情感”或强调“每个成员”时，用复数形式。如：
The audience was in good order .
观众保持良好的秩序。（指整体状态）
The audience were greatly encouraged .
观众们深受鼓舞。（指具体的人）
常用的集合名词有：group ,class ,team ,family ,nation ,army ,crowd ,audience ,public, government , majority（大多数）等。
有些集合名词如people、cattle（牛群）等在任何情况下都与谓语动词的复数形式搭配。
④ 就近原则
以连词or either…or neither…nor not only…but also…连接的名词或代词作主语时，谓语动词与其相邻的那个名词的数一致。
如： # Among the boys ,one or two are able to jump 1.6 metres .
在这些同学中，一二个人能跳过1.6米。
⑤ 以 “某些不定代词或表示数量的词 + of + 名词”的结构，谓语形式要与of 后的名词保持一致。
常见的这类词有：all , some , a lot , plenty , any , part ,the rest ,one-third percent + of
如： 70 percent of the surface is covered with water .
70 percent of the farmers have impoved their living conditions .
⑥ 有些不定代词或表示数字的名词修饰的名词或词组作主语时，句中谓语动词用复数。这类词组常用的有：few (of ) , a few , both , both of ,a number of + 复数名词+谓语动词（复数）
如： # Few of the students were in the classroom yesterday , for it was Sunday .
昨天教室里没有几个人，因为是星期日。
[注]：在 “ a number of + 名词（复数）” 结构中，“复数名词”是中心词，“a number of ”作定语，谓语用复数形式；而在 “ the number of + 名词（复数）” 结构中， “the number “是“中心词”，谓语动词用单数形式。如：
A number of questions were always asked when the manager got to his office .
The number of the students in this school is 1,560.
[注] 当 “the number”.表示“…数量或号码”时，谓语动词用单数。如：
The number of the key is 207.
⑦ “the + 形容词（分词或数词）” 结构起名词作用时
如果这个结构表示的是一类人，谓语动词用复数形式；如果这个结构表示抽象概念（或具体的某一个人），谓语用单数形式。如：
The young are able to create their own future.
There was an old lady and a young girl in the park . The young was the daughter of the old .
The wounded were taken to hospital without delay .
⑧ 表示重量、距离、金钱，一段时间及由one and a half修饰的复数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。如：
Twenty dollars isn’t enough to buy the book .
Ten miles isn’t far .
Five times six is thirty.
One and a half apples was left on the plate .
二、学海导航
如何培养和提高作答单项填空题的能力。
单项填空题主要考查中学阶段所学词法和句法中常见的语言内容，试题具有信息量大，综合性强，突出语言的交际能力等特点。回答单项填空题，不能单纯从语法规则入手，而是要求考生必须从题干提供的语言环境出发，综合所学的语言语法知识正确判断。建议参考以下三个步骤：
1.认真阅读提纲，了解大意；
2.根据句中所缺部分和四个选项的概念和形式，判断考查什么；
3.从提纲的内容和选项的形式两个方面进行匹配，达到内容和形式的统一。如：
________want to work in Xinjiang after graduation.
A. Not only Ann but also her friends B. Neither Ann nor Tom
C. Either Ann or her friend D. Nobody but Ann
答案：A
解析：此题句子大意是“……想毕业后去新疆工作”根据句中所缺部分和四个选项不难看出此题考查的是主谓一致问题。句中“want”是一般现在时复数形式，那么，此句的主语应是复数形式；四个选项是D是单数，故与本题要求不符；A，B，C三项都是由连词连接的两个名词作主语。根据“就近原则”（见主谓一致问题4）答案为A。
另外，进行自我训练时，要注意按高考要求的时间（12分钟）完成25个单选题。并查出造成失误的原因。如：知识不准确；偏重语法而忽视内容；或受母语的干扰等原因造成的失误。发现问题，抓住重点，集中一段时间重点突破。
三、智能显示
1. 检查方式
（1） 按课文有关人口，历史，政府等分项复述课文，然后，再复述全文；
（2） 群体复述课文 ( Retell in group )
（3）改写课文
2. 同步训练
① 课文要点训练
I. 单词拼写（计分10）
1. Many Europeans e______ the continent of Africa in the 19th century. 1___________
2. The moment old Jonh put a h________ of sweets on the chair by the bed , little Tom ran towards to it . 2___________
3. India gained i_______ from Britain in 1947. 3___________
4. Marx once said that labour c________ man itself . 4____________
5. After reading the letter from her boss , Jane t______ it up and threw
it into the dustbin. 5____________
6. I wouldn’t think it w______ to ask him join the club─he’ll only refuse. 6____________
7. Bob was a shy boy ,and he always sat a _____ from the other children. 7____________
8. This medicine has an u_____ taste , but it is of great help. 8____________
9. Ann asked Jim to give up smoking not only because she o___ to the smell. 9___________
10. About 70 percent of the p_______ in China are peasants . 10___________
Ⅱ. 单项选择（计分15）
11. Will you please ______ the radio ? The baby is sleeping.
A. turn off B. turn down C. turn up D. turn on
12. The husband coughed day and night .It’s the wife’s fault for giving______ to him so that he didn’t stop smoking .
A. up B. off C. in D. out
13. -Why ______ they ______ the building?
-Because another new one is to be built there .
A. have been destroyed B. did pull down
C. do remove D. are turning down
14. -It is the people who ______ history.
-And labour ____ man itself .
A. create created B. created invented
C. discover made D. invent creates
15. ─I have much difficulty _______ maths.
─Well , I have some trouble________ the English pronunciation.
A. in with B. in learning with C. with in D. in in
16. -You shouldn’t ______ from the girls in your class.
-But I don’t like ______ .
A. keep away being laughed at B. keep to laugh at
C. turn away to be laughed at D. return laughing
17. Last year some over _____ buildings ______ in the city.
A. 20-story were set up B. 20-storey set up
C. 20-storied had set up D. 20-floor had been set up
18. The old mother was _______ to hear that her daughter had a ____ journey.
A. pleasant pleasant B. pleased pleased
C. pleased pleasing D. pleased pleasant
19. -The young mother ______ her baby Jimmy.
-Really ? My brother ______ Jimmy , too .
A. calls names B. named is named
C. named was named D. called calls
20. Old Jack made a living _____ waste paper ,while his brother _______on slaves .
A. by selling made money B. to sell was rich
C. with lives D. on earns his living
21. _____ about three hundred people _____ the local illnesses ____ in that area.
A. As is known to us die from one year
B. It is said that die of a year
C. As we know are killed per year
D. It is reported that kill every year
22. _____ you are unwell , I’ll go to the meeting instead .
A. Because B. For C. Now that D. Though
23. We come to realize that we have to try our best to create a new life _____ our own and ______our own .
A. with , by B. on with C. of by D. for on
24. Don’t you think what to learn in class ____ the same effect ____ the character of the students ______ what to learn through practice ?
A. has on as B. have for as C. is in that D. are to from
25. Which of the following is NOT correct ?
A. Japan faces the Pacific on the east .
B. Taiwan lies in the east of Fujian belonging to China.
C. North of the United States lies Canada .
D. Britain stands to the northwest of France.
（2）语法训练（主谓一致）：
Ⅲ.单项选择
26. All of the work _____ finished and neither the teacher nor the students _____ enough time now .
A. is , has B. is , have C. are , has D. are ,have
27. What I saw ______ two boys running after the thief .
A. is B.are C. are D. were
28. This exercise on agreement of subjects and verbs ______ easy for you .
A. is B. was C. was D. were
29. Here _______ the papers you ask for .
A. is B. was C. were D. are
30. There ______ to be many arguments on both side.
A. seems B. is C. seem D. are
31. Half of the money ________ to you and half of the books _______ to you , too .
A. belong, belong B. belongs , belongs
C. belong, belongs D. belongs, belong
32. Taking pictures _______ not only young men but also many of the old people .
A. are interested in B. are interesting
C. interests D. is interested in
33. Ten minutes _______ more than enough time to complete this exercise.
A. are B. is C. were D. was
34. One hundred and fifty pounds _______ what you should weigh.
A. are B. maybe C. should be D. is
35. You are the one who ______ wrong that Susan is one of those people who ______ out of their way to be helpful .
A. are , goes B. are , go C. is , go D. is , goes
36. Where and when to go ______ Jack since his graduation from college .
A. has been troubling B. has been troubled
C. have troubled D. have been troubling
37. Six eights _____ forty- eight , while six times nine _____ fifty - four .
A. is , are B. are , is C. is , is D. are ,are
38. Nobody but you _______ going to London on business next month.
A. are B. were C. is D. was
39. It ________ Tom and John who ______ here yesterday preparing for today’s experiment.
A. were, were B. are , were C. was , were D. is , were
40. None of the four boys ______ a good swimmer two years ago , but now all of them ______ able to swim across the river .
A. was , are B. is , are C. are , are D. was ,is
Ⅳ. 完型填空（计分20）
Chicago --- lying in the east of the USA--- is a rather young American city . It was 41 completely rebuilt 42 the Creat Fire of 1871. One’s first impression of the city may 43 streams of cars running to and 44 on the highways , skyscrapers and the wide green water of Lake Michigan , 45 lies to the northeast of the city . The 46 of the city is over 228 square miles 47 a population of about 3 million .
The 48 of Chicago on the whole is almost the same as 49 of Beijing with 50 hot days in summer , 51 and fresh days in 52 and icy but often 53 days in winter . The spring in Chicago is 54 changeable in temperature. For instance, I saw a snowfall in early 55 this year 56 some of the flowers were already in 57 bloom . Chicago is also famous 58 its frequent strong winds , and 59 it has got the name of “ the 60 City .”
41. A. most B. almost C. mostly D. merely
42. A. before B. since C. after D. when
43. A. have B. mean C. be D. include
44. A. from B. above C. down D. along
45. A. when B. that C. which D. where
46. A. land B. measure C. area D. size
47. A. having B. with C. for D. and
48. A. climate B. weather C. temperature D. season
49. A. which B. it C. the one D. that
50. A. fairly B. rather C. much D. too
51. A. colorful B. colorless C. colour D. coloured
52. A. spring B. winter C. fall D. summer
53. A. clean B. clear C. cleaning D. clearly
54. A. little B. bit C. a lot D. a little
55. A. April B. May C. January D. June
56. A. and B. but C. when D. while
57. A. full B. filled C. filling D. full of
58. A. as B. for C. of D. with
59. A. in fact B. in a word C. as a result D. above all
60. A. Snowy B. Windy C. Rainy D. Sunny
V. 阅读理解（计分25）
（ A ）
Christopher Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October , 1492. He had spent eighteen years in planning for that wonderful voyage which he made a cross the Atlantic Ocean .The Spanish king and queen ,who were interested in finding a sea route to India ,offered him ships and men so that he could carry out his plan . He crossed the Ocean and discovered strange islands ,inhabited ( vt. 居住于) by people unknown to Europeans .He believed these islands to be part of India.
Early in 1493, Columbus returned to Spain. There was great rejoicing（欢庆）in the country , and he was hailed（欢呼）as the hero who had made an epoch-making discovery .Crowds of people lined the streets to do him honour , and the king and queen welcomed him to their palace. Never had such respect been shown to any common man.
61. Christopher Columbus discovered America ________.
A. on the 12th of November
B. more than 800 years
C. at the beginning of the fifteenth century
D. by the end of the fifteenth century
62. He had spent ______ in planning for the wonderful voyage .
A. eighteen days B. eighteen months
C. eighteen years D. much time
63. Finally the Spanish king and queen offered him ships and men so that _____.
A. he would have faith in himself
B. he could work out his new plan
C. he could display his courage
D. he could put his plan into practice.
64. He crossed the ocean and discovered strange islands , inhabited ______.
A. by a people unknown to Europeans
B. by a people already known to Europeans
C. by Europeans
D. by his fellow-countrymen
65. After returning to Spain he was hailed as the hero ______.
A. who had conquered（征服）nature
B. who had made an epoch-making discovery
C. who had discovered a new planet
D. who had made a great invention
（ B ）
The United States became a rich industrial nation toward the end of the 1800s . There were more goods ,more services , more jobs ,and a high standard of living . There was more of everything, including problems .One problem was monopoly（垄断）. In some cases ,several companies that made the same product would agree not to compete with one another .They would all agree to charge the same price .These agreements made it impossible for buyers to shop around for lower prices for certain products .
Some people decided that huge companies had too much power and controlled too many markets . Because of their wealth and power , they could see to it that governments passed laws favorable to them . Many people believed that monopoly and price fixing were bad for buyers and bad for the country so that they should be broken up .
Such laws and government action didn’t entirely do away with monopoly. Nor did they stop the growth of huge companies . But they did show the American people had decided that some of the changes that taken place were harmful .
66. From paragraph 1, we can know that big companies ______.
A. produced certain kinds of goods
B. sold the same goods at the different prices
C. formed only one big company
D. reached and agreement on prices
67. Because of the agreements between big companies ,______.
A. people had to buy things at certain shops
B. the prices of their goods were much lower
C. people had no choice but to buy goods at fixed prices
D. there were fewer markets in some states
68. According to the laws passed by the national government , companies _______.
A. were not allowed to control the markets
B. could not force people to buy their products
C. should have fixed prices for their products
D. must produce the same kind of goods for the same markets .
69. Some American people thought that ________.
A. the government should make some of the huge companies much smaller
B. the country’s industry was growing too rapidly
C. shops should have the same price for the same kind of goods
D. their country’s getting rich was both good and bad to the people.
70. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage ?
A. Big companies could not have any effort on the governments .
B. A certain number of markets were still controlled by big companies .
C. Many Americans were worried about the changes in their country.
D. Some of the laws were in favor of buyers .
短文改错（计分15）：
One afternoon in April , 1912, a new ship set off 71_______________
from England to America on it first trip . It was one of 72_______________
the largest and first ship at that time . 73_______________
It was cold , but the trip was pleasant and people are 74_______________
enjoying themselves . The next day was even cold . People 75_______________
could see icebergs here or there . It was night , suddenly 76_______________
the man on watch shouting “Look out ! Iceberg !” 77_______________
It was too late ,a ship hit the iceberg and came to 78_______________
a stop . There that was a very big hole in the ship and 79_______________
water began to come .Slowly the ship stated to go down . 80_______________
参考答案：
1. explored 2. handful 3. independence 4. created 5. tore 6. worthwhile 7.apart 8. unpleasant 9. objected 10. population
11-15. B C D A B 16-20. C A D B A 21-25. B C D A B 26-30. B B A D C 31-35. D C B D A 36-40. A B C C A
41-45. B C D A C 46-50. C B A D B 51-55. A C B D A 56-60. D A B C B
61-65. D C D A B 66-70. D C A D A
71. √ 72. on it --- on its 73. ship ---ships 74. Are --- were 75. Cold---colder 76. or --- and 77. shouting ---shouted 78. a ship --- the ship 79. that 80. come --- come in
Unit 13 The USA
一、同步题库
(一)单项填空
1.Their wedding yesterday. Many friends came to congratulate them on their marriage.
A.was taken place B.was to happen C.took place D.would hold
2.Since he is ready to help you, you should say“thank you”.
A.at last B.at first C.at most D.at least
3.Mr Smith with his wife goes to the cinema .
A.day by day B.now and again C.here and there D.day and night
4.Drivers,of course,want to travel miles with petrol and
hours.
A.many,a little,few B.more,fewer,less
C.more,less,fewer D.many,less,fewer
5.The rain has my new dress.
A.damaged B.hurt C.destroyed D.failure
6.He was sorry to fail again in the driving test. His only was that he was too nervous.
A.reason B.cause C.regret D.failure
7.Good advice is price.
A.over B.cause C.destroyed D.ruined
8.The basin of water won't freeze, the temperature is well above zero.
A.unless B.because C.even if D.as though
9. put the medicine the little boy can't reach it.
A.Do,where B.Don't that C.Just,which D.Do,there
10.Rather than on a crowded bus,he always prefers a bicycle.
A.to ride,riding B.ride,to ride C.ride,ride D.riding ride
11.You can fly to London this evening you don't mind changing planes in
Paris.
A.except B.if C.until D.unless
12.It's rule that comes home first cooks the dinner for the whole family.
A.who B.somebody who C.whoever D.anybody
13.Beautifully ,the little girl tried to make herself .
A.dressed,noticed B.what will man look like
C.dressed,noticing D.dressed,notice
14.The weather turned out to be very good, was morethan we could expect.
A.what B.which C.that D.if
15.No one can be sure in a million years.
A.what man will look like B.what will man look like
C.man will look like what D.what look will man like
(二)用合适的介词或副词填空
1. my horror,I noticed two men trying to break my office.
2.- the same,I expect you'll come to visit my hometown.
-I'm looking forward that.
3.Farmland is becoming smaller day day several reasons.
4.Don't drive into the bush plenty of water and never throw your cigarette
of the window .
5.We must try all means to get rid flies.
6.Generally speaking,a newly-built house is likely to fall ,
the case of an earthquake.
7. 1920,people from Italy have come to Australia great numbers.
8.The village used to be rather poor.One every three children could
not go to school and most families were debt.
9.-How do farmers round their sheep or cattle?
-It depends the size of their farms.
10.No one has far been brave to enter the forest alone.
(三)改正下面句子的错误(无错的句子不要改；有错的句子中每句只有一处错误)
1.The long fence is used to keeping out a kind of wild dog.
2.Cattles are kept in some countries mainly for beef.
3.They pay peasants very a little money to work in the fields for them.
4.He had to have a job, or go hunger.
5.Their mother can't afford to feed them to meat and fish every day.
6.New types of plants have been developed in Egypt to grow in desert land.
7.Live by hunting, they are very experienced at killing wild animals.
8.In area, Australia is about the same size of the USA, which has more than thirteen times as many people.
9.In Australia fruit and vegetables are grown in areas where is enough water.
10.What surprised me was that he spoke English so well.
11.Mr White slowed down his car, for he saw a blind man cross the road.
12.Why did she keep on wipe her eyes with a damp towel?
(四)完形填空
Agatha Christie seldom went out at night. She never(1)the night when she met a(2)many years ago.
That evening she was (3)to a birthday party which (4)until 2 o'clock in the
morning.Agatha(5)in the quiet street alone.Suddenly from the shadow(阴影)of a (6)building a tall man with a sharp knife in his right hand (7)out at her.“Good morning,lady,” the man said in a (8)voice,“I don't think you wish to (9)here!”
“What do you(10)?”Agatha asked.
“Your earrings(耳环).Take them off!”
Agatha suddenly had a (11)idea.She tried to cover her necklace (12)the collar(衣领)of her overcoat while she used(13)hand to take off her earrings and then she quickly(14)them on the groud.“Take them(15)let me go.”The robber(16)that the girl didn't care for the earrings at all,only trying to (17)the necklace.He thought the necklace (18)cost more,so he said,“Give me your necklace.”
“Oh,sir,It's(19)worth much.Please let me(20)it.”“Stop rubbish(废话).Quick!”
With (21)hands,Agatha took off her necklace.As soon as the robber (22),she picked up her earrings and ran as (23)as she could to one of her friends.The earrings (24)480pounds and the necklace the robber had taken(25)was worth six pounds.
1.A.minded B.forgot C.remember D.regretted
2.A.friend B.murderer C.robber D.stranger
3.A.invited B.asked C.going D.walking
4.A.delayed B.ended C.began D.lasted
5.A.walked B.drove C.waited D.watched
6.A.small B.dark C.old D.low
7.A.looked B.shouted C.stepped D.ran
8.A.loud B.low C.die D.cry
9.A.suffer B.quarrel C.die D.cry
10.A.like B.mean C.want D.say
11.A.bright B.foolish C.funny D.safe
12.A.under B.by C.with D.below
13.A.her right B.her left C.the other D.another
14.A.dropped B.put C.laid D.threw
15.A.and B.but C.so D.then
16.A.knew B.saw C.observed D.thought
17.A.wave B.hid C.defend D.protect
18.A.would B.must C.should D.could
19.A.really B.actually C.even D.not
20.A.wear B.keep C.have D.take
21.A.nervous B.little C.shaky D.beautiful
22.A.signed B.permitted C.disappeared D.nodded
23.A.calmly B.quietly C.quick D.fast
24.A.worth B.valued of C.sold D.cost
25.A.away B.out C.off D.down
答案：(一)1-5 C D B C D 6-10A C B A B 11-15B C A B A
(二)1.To,into 2.All,to 3.by,for 4.with,out either 5.by,of 6.less,down,in 7.Since,in 8.in,in 9.up,on 10.so,enough
(三)1.keeping鰇eep 2.Cattles鯟attle 3.去掉a 4.hunger鰄ungry 5.to鰋n 6.对 7.Live鯨iving 8.of鯽s 9.is前加there 10.对 11.cross鯿rossing 12.wipe鰓iping
(四)1.B 2.C 3.A 4.C 5.A 6.B 7.D 8.B 9.C 10.C 11.A 12.C 13.C 14.D 15.A 16.B 17.D 18.A 19.D 20.B 21.C 22.C 23.D 24.D 25.A
篇10：英语单词游戏64(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
1抢读字母
这是一个训练学生认读字母的游戏，教师将全班分成若干小组，然后逐个出示字母卡片，学生们举手抢答，教师让最先举手的学生读出该字母，读对的给该组记10分，最后得分最多的组为优胜。
2抢答字母组
将全班分成两个小组，并把两套字母卡片分别发给各组学生。游戏开始，教师用中文说：“乐谱的七个调”，“美国”，“圆心和半径”，“中华人民共和国”，持有这些字母卡片的学生应立即站起来并举起字母“ABCDEFG，”USA“，o，r”，“PRC”等，答得既快又准的组获胜。
3看谁快
这是一个训练学生听字母的游戏，将全班分成两组，一组学生持大写字母，另一组学生持小写字母，教师快速念字母，要求持有该字母的学生迅速站起来，最先站起来的人得两分，后站起来的得一分，没站出来的得零分，得分多的组获胜。
4听音辨字母
这是一个训练学生辨别字母的游戏。教师可将读音易混的字母分别写在板上，如GJOW，等，共准备2～4套，同时将学生分成2～4个小组，每组抽一名学生到前面向全班站好，教师发给每人一套卡片(2～4张为宜)，游戏开始，教师念其中的一个字母，学生应立即找出并高举起该字母，先找对的得2分，后找对的得1分，没找对的不得分，最后得分多的组为优胜。
5听音摘字母比赛
这是一个训练学生听认字母能力的游戏，教师先把所学过的大小写字母写在卡片上，按大小写把卡片分成两组贴在黑板上，然后把学生分成两组。游戏开始，每组的第一名学生上黑板前等候，教师说出一个字母，这两名学生就立即摘下教师所念的字母，放到讲台上，一人摘大写字母，另一人摘小写字母，摘得对而快的得2分，对而慢的得1分，不对的不得分，在教师念第一个字母时，各组的第二名学生应上前等候，在第一名学生摘完字母后，教师立即说另一个字母，游戏接着进行，最后得分多的组为优胜。
6图形中找字母
教师在黑板上画一些图形，让学生找出其中所含的字母，例如：
CDIO bdpq CIDO EFHIL
7宾狗(Bingo)
这是一个训练学生听写认读字母能力的游戏，每个学生准备一张纸，并在上面画一个井字，将纸分成九格，然后教师随便念九个学过的字母，学生边听边将字母填在格子中，随便填在哪个格里都行。学生填好后，教师再打乱顺序逐个念这九个字母，学生边听边在听到的字母上画圈，当画的圈在横行、竖行或对角线上成一条直线时，学生便可以边喊“宾狗(Bingo)”边将纸举起让教师检查，最先喊“宾狗”并写得准确的获胜。这个游戏还可以用于音标，单词或数词等。
8传递字母
每一纵排为一组，全班分成若干组，教师分别发给每一组最后一排的学生一张纸，上面写一个字母或字母组(如：KG-PV)，在教师说“开始”后，最后一排的学生即用耳语把卡片上的内容告诉前面的学生，这位学生再把听到的内容告诉前面的学生…这样依次进行下去，最后第一排的学生把所传的字母或字母组写到黑板上，传得最快，最准确的组获胜。
9跟我走
这是一个训练学生按字母表顺序记忆字母的游戏。开始前，先把字母卡片发给学生。然后说出一个字母(如：M)，持有该字母卡片的学生站出来并说：
I am M Follow me ,please.持有字母N的学生应立刻站在持M卡片学生的后面，并说：I am N. Follow me. please，依次类推，对的给10分，错的不给分，这个游戏也可以倒着排次序，也可说 I am M. Who is before me? 持字母L的学生应立刻站在持M卡片学生的前面。
10字母排次序
这是一个训练学生记忆字母顺序的游戏。教师点名，并出示一张字母卡片。被点名的学生立即读出这个字母，并说出一个包含该字母读音的单词接着由被点名学生的前一位学生说出这个字母的前一个字母，和一个含有该字母读音的单词，然后由被点名学生后面一位学生说出这个字母的下一个字母和含有该字母的单词，如：被点名学生：B-bag，前面的学生：A-apple，后面的学生：C-cat凡说错或接不上的就给该组记负分。
11字母排顺序接力赛
把两组20个字母大小写的卡片打乱次序贴在黑板上，一边一组。然后将全班分成两组(或按男女分组)，游戏开始，各组依次上来一个学生，以接力的方式，一人移动一个字母，按字母表的顺序重新排列，看哪组最快最准确。
12快说字母对抗赛
将全班分成若干小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即说出一个字母(如C)，第二组的第一名学生应立即说出下一个字母D。说错或不能迅速说出字母的记负分，最后哪组扣分最少为优胜。
13字母排队
每人发一张字母卡片，教师说一个字母(如C)，则持字母C及其后四个字母(DEFG)的学生应立即站出来按次序排好队，如班级人数较多，也可以将学生分成两组进行竞赛。
14大写找小写
教师在黑板上贴出一组大写字母，每组找一名学生到讲台上来，教师发给他们打乱次序的小写字母卡片，在教师宣布“开始”后，他们要尽快按大写字母的次序把小写字母贴在黑板上，贴得最快最准确的组获胜。
15 抢凳子
教师将学生分成两组，分别发给26个字母大写和小写的卡片，并在台前摆放五张凳子围成一圈，游戏开始，教师说出三个字母，同时开始播放音乐，两个组中持这三个字母卡片的六个学生应立即上前并围着凳子小跑；音乐一停就抢凳子坐好，组内三个人都抢到凳子的，给该组记10分。
16 字母滚雪球
这是个训练学生记忆字母能力的游戏，把学生分成若干组或男女两组。游戏开始，第一位学生说一个字母(如：B)第二位学生在后任意加上一个字母(如：BE)然后依次进行(如B…BE…BEX…BEXG…BEXGL…)，说错了就被淘汰，说得多而准确的小组为胜。
17猜字母
全班分成若干组，教师给学生们出示一些字母卡片(如10个字母)，让学生们认读后，教师任意抽出一张卡片放在背后，依次让各组的学生猜，猜对的组得10分，然后教师再出另一张继续让学生们猜，各组第一排的学生都猜过后，第二排的学生接着猜，最后看哪一组得分多。
18 字母书写传递比赛
这是一个训练学生书写字母的游戏，以每一排为一组，将全班分成若干组，教师分别发给每组最后一排的学生一张纸片，上面写有一个字母，只允许这个学生看这个字母，在教师说“开始”后，最后一排的学生即用手指把纸片上的字母写在前面学生的背上…这样依次进行下去，最后第一排的学生把所传的字母写到黑板上，传得最快最准确的组获胜。
19字母书写对抗赛
在黑板上挂一张字母表，参赛的两个组各派四人到前面，面对全班站好队，游戏开始，甲组的第一名学生转过身面向黑板，乙组的第一名学生在字母表上任意指一个字母，甲组的第一名学生看清后，便在该组第二名学生的背上用手指写这个字母，然后让第二名学生把这个字母说出来，说对的记10分，游戏继续进行，由甲组的第一名学生指字母，乙组的第一名学生书写，乙组的第二名学生猜字母，最后得分多的组获胜。
20 找元音
教师给学生们一些既有元音字母，又有辅音字母的卡片，每个学生持一张，教师说“开始”后，持有元音字母卡片的学生应立即举着卡片，到前面来按次序站队，这游戏也可将全班学生分成两组进行竞赛，按正确次序先站好队的组获胜。
21 找伙伴
教师发给学生们字母卡片，每个学生持一张，然后让持有含相同音素的字母的学生站在一起，如教师说音素，则持有F，M，N，S，X等字母的学生应立刻到前面站在一起。
22 摘苹果，学音素
教师先在黑板上挂一张长满苹果的果树挂图，每个苹果上都写有一个字母，再出示几个篮子，每只篮子都贴有一个字母，如S，A(或K)E(或P)，然后找几名学生上前面来，把果树上的苹果摘下来，将含有相同音素的字母放入相应的篮子里，如：将写有F，M，N，X等字母的苹果放在贴有字母S的篮子里，将写有B，C，D，V等字母的苹果放入有字母E(或P)的篮子里，最快最准确的获胜。
33抢读单词
这是训练学生从认读单词能力的游戏，教师将全班分成若干小组，然后逐个出示一些单词卡片或图片，学生们举手抢答，教师让最先举手的学生读出该单词并说出其中的意思，或将图片上的单词读出来拼出来，读对说对拼对的给该组记10分，得分最多的组为优胜。
34看图猜词
以每一纵行为一组进行竞赛，教师先出示一些单词的图片，然后收起来，再从中抽出一张放在身后，由每组的第一名学生轮流猜，可以问：“Is it a plane (bus, bike)?”回答：Yes it is.或No，It isn’t.等。哪个组猜对了就给记10分，然后接着往下猜，第一排的学生猜过后第二排接着猜，最后得分最多的组为优胜。做这个游戏时，还可以找一位学生来主持，由他让学生们猜。
35看图写单词
这是让学生们复习学过单词的游戏，教师事先把需复习的20个单词用简笔画画在小黑板上或大白纸上，先不要让学生们看见，然后将全班按前后左右四人一组分成若干小组。竞赛开始，教师将小黑板或白纸挂起来，让学生们看一分钟，然后收起来，再给学生们两分钟时间将看到的单词写出来，写得最多最正确的组获胜。
36相同词首单词拼读赛
将全班分成若干小组，教师说一个字母(如：D)，第一组的第一名学生立即站起来，说出并拼出三个(也可以是五个或十个，视学生词汇量的多少而定)以字母D打头的单词，如：desk,dog,door等，念不出或念错要扣分，这位学生说完后，教师念另一个字母，由第二组的第一名学生说。这样依次进行下去，最后看哪组得人最多为胜，做这个游戏时，也可以让两组的学生轮流说字母(如由第一组的第一名学生说字母，由第二组的第一名学生答)这样就成了对抗赛，注意不要说Q，X，Z等字母。
37拼单词对抗赛
将全班分成若干小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即用中文说出一个单词(如：自行车)，第一组的第二名学生应立即将这个单词说出来，说错或不能迅速说出单词的记负分，最后哪组扣分最少为优胜。
39相同元音单词拼读对抗赛
将全z班分成若干小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，游戏开始，教师说一个单词(如：bike)，第一组的学生A应立即站起来，说出一个含相同元音(即元音［ai］的单词)，如：five，说出词义并拼出来，说不出，说错词义拼错要扣分，这位学生说完后，教师念另一个单词，由第二组的学生A站起来说，这样依次进行下去，最后看哪组得分最多为优胜。做这个游戏时，也可以让两组学生轮流说单词(如由第一组的学生A说一个单词，由第二组的学生A答)，这样就成了对抗赛。
40拼读单词列队比赛
将全班分成两组，教师发给每个学生一张字母卡片，不常用的字母(如Q，Z)可以一人多拿几张，游戏开始，教师说一个单词，如ship，或出示一张轮船的图片，两个组持S，H，I，P字母的学生应立即站到讲台前按顺序站好队，先按正确次序排好队的为优胜。
41单词接龙
将全班分成若干组，每组来一个学生在黑板上写出一个以某字母为词首的单词，前一个单词的词尾字母作下一个单词的词首字母。在规定时间内哪一组接的词最多为优胜。如：pen-nice-eight-tea-an-no-or-right-teacher-radio-on-nor等。
42猜袋中物
教师从书包中拿出一件东西放入一只不透明的袋子里，由每组的第一名学生轮流猜，可以问：“Is it a banana(an apple, orange)?”猜对了为优胜。
43换宝
教师准备好一些单词卡片(有的写中文，有的写英词)和图画。将卡片和图画放入一只不透明的袋子里。游戏开始教师说，袋子里装的是许多宝物，让学生们上来轮流摸宝，如果摸到的是写有英文的卡片，则要英译汉；如果是中文，则要汉译英并拼读出来；如果是图片，则要看图说英语。
44看图猜词大家答
教师先出示一些单词的图片，然后收起来，请一名学生到前面猜，猜的学生面对全班，再请另一名学生上前站在他身后，抽出一张图片高举在手中。猜的学生可以问全班：“Is it a plan(ship,bike)?”等，全班学生答：“Yes.”或“ No.”猜对后可以换另一位学生继续猜。
45猜颜色
教师先准备一些单词的图片。如白色的飞机，红色的小汽车，黑色的鞋，绿色的上衣等。游戏开始，请一名学生到前面来猜，猜的学生面对全班站立，再请另一名学生上前站在他身后，抽出一张图片高举在手中并说：“This is a plane(car).What colour is it?Please guess.”猜的学生可以问全班：“Is it red (black)?”等，全班学生答：“Yes.”或“No.”猜对后可以换另一位学生继续猜。
46缺了什么
这是训练学生记忆力的游戏。教师出示一些实物，放在讲台上，让上来猜的学生先看半分钟，然后背向讲台面向学生站立，再让另一位学生上来取走一样东西。然后说：“Pease guess What is missing?”猜的学生要在10秒钟内用英语把缺的东西说出来。
47传递单词
每一排为一组，全班分成若干组，教师分别发给每一组最后一排的学生一张纸，上面写个单词。在教师说开始后，最后一排的学生即用耳词把纸上的单词告诉前面的学生，这位学生再把听到的单词告诉前面的学生…这样依次进行下去。最后，第一排的学生把所传的单词写到黑板上，传得最快，最准的组获胜。
48找对子
教师将20个单词的图片贴在黑板上，另外将20张对应的单词卡扣着放在讲台上，然后让参赛的两组学生逐一上来抽卡片，抽出卡片后先要举给学生们看，然后把黑板上相应的图摘下来并将单词读出来，找对读对的得2分，找对读错给1分，找错了的不得分，卡片全部抽完后，得分多的为优胜。
49摸鼻子
这是训练学生听单词并快速作出反应的游戏，在学了单词nose,ear,eye,leg,hand,arm,finger等单词后，教师可快速说出这些单词，学生听到指令便用手触摸这个部位，最快最准的获胜，当学生做得非常熟悉后，还可以增加难度，可要求学生听到哪个单词不许摸哪个部位，如教师说“nose”，学生不可以摸鼻子，但可以摸眼睛，耳朵，嘴等其它部位，这个游戏可以用竞赛的形式进行，每组抽一名学生到前面作动作，做错了就被淘汰，最后剩下的一人或两人为优胜。
50听单词做动作
这个游戏的玩法与“摸鼻子差不多，在学了run, walk, sit, stand, swim, skate, play, football, play, basketboll等动词和动词词组后，教师可快速说出这些动词或词组，学生听到便做动作，最快最准的获胜，这个游戏同样可以用竞赛的形式进行，每组抽一名学生到前面做动作，做错了就被淘汰，最后剩下的一人或两人为优胜。
51宾狗(Bingo)
这个游戏的玩法与游戏(7)相同，每个学生准备一张纸，并在上面画一个井字，将纸分成九格，然后教师随便念九个学过的单词，学生边听边将单词写在格子中，随便填在哪格里都好。学生填好后，教师再打扰次序逐个念这九个单词，学生边听边在听到单词上画圈，当画的圈在横行、竖行或对角线上成为一条直线时，学生就可边喊“宾狗(Bingo)”边将纸举起让教师检查，最先喊“宾狗”写得准确的获胜。这个游戏还可以用于数词，也就是说，教师可以随意念九个数词来代替九个单词，让学生填入格子中。
52报电话号码对抗赛
以下几个游戏都是训练学生说数词能力的，这个游戏的玩法是：将全班分成若干个小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，参赛的每个学生都要准备一张纸，上面写一个六位数的电话号码，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即出示他手中的号码，第二组的第一名学生应立即用英文将这个号码说出来，然后该学生出示手中的号码，第一组的第二名学生应立即将这个号码说出来，说错或不能迅速说出的记负分，最后哪组扣发最少为优胜。
53猜年龄
教师事先准备好一批人物的图片，如Mike,Kate等，在图片的反面写上数字，如5，8，11，15等。这个游戏可以每一纵行为一组进行竞赛。由教师或一位学生出示一张图片，由每组的第一名学生轮流猜，可以说：“Is he(she)twelve(eleven)?”等。哪个组的学生猜对了就给该组记10分，然后接着往下猜。第一排的学生猜过后第二排接着猜。最后哪个组得分最多为优胜。
54加减运算对抗赛
将全班分成若干个小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即出一道加减题，如：Three and four.等，第二组的第一名学生应立即用英文将答案说出来，如：seven,three等，然后，该学生出另一道题，由第一组的第二名学生回答，答错或不能迅速答出的记负分，最后哪组扣分最少优胜。
55猜袋中东西数
将全班分成若干小组，每组抽一人到前面，背对着班级。教师拿一个袋子，并向学生们借一些书本，铅笔，钢笔，橡皮等，放入袋中，然后让各组学生轮流猜袋子里东西的数目，猜对的给该组记10分。
56找邻居
教师让全班学生依次报数，然后用汉语说一个数，如“三十六”则三十六号学生应立即起来并用英语报数“thirty-six”，然后前面一号(35号)和后面一号(37号)就要相继站起来，用英语说“thirty-five”和“thirty-seven”。这个游戏也可以分组竞赛，教师可将学生按左右分成两组，一组报单数，另一组报双数，在教师说一个数(如“二十七”)后，某一组中的27号学生应首先站起来用英语说“twenty-seven”另一组中其后面一号(28号)的学生要紧接着站起来，用英语说“twenty-eight”，不能迅速站起来或是说错了的要扣分，最后扣分最少的组为优胜。
57拍七
将全班按纵行分成若干组，每组派一至二人到前面围成一圈，教师任意指定一个学生开始说one，然后依次让第二个two说，第三个说three…说到seven,seventeen…或七的倍数(如fourteen,twenty-one等)时，就不报数而用拍手代替，该拍手时报了数，或者报错了数字，就被罚下去。游戏重新开始，直到剩下最后两个人，给这两个组记10分。做这个游戏，还可以与记单词结合起，可以在该拍手时说一个刚学过的比较难记的单词，如language等，说错了要被罚下去，并换一个单词重新开始游戏，这样不仅可以帮助学生读英语单词，还可以复习单词，这个游戏除了可以分组竞赛外，还可以在全班进行。
58找出不合群的单词
教师说一组单词(如car,bus,jeep,sheep)，比一比谁能最先挑出意义上不合群的词。上述单词中sheep不合群,因为car,bus,jeep,属于交通工具一类的，而sheep属于动物一类的词。
59增减字母变单词
教师说出或出示一个单词，要求学生增加或减少一个字母使其变成另一个单词，如：it-its,read-red.这个游戏也可以进行抢答。
60变换字母次序组成新单词
教师说出或出示一个单词，要求学生变换字母次序使其变成另一个单词，如：east-seat,这个游戏也可以进行抢答。下列单词可供参考，are-ear;read-dear;meat-team;stop-spot;now-won等。
61分拆单词链
教师出示一个单词锭，如there door under，要求学生在一定时间内将单词链拆成最多的单词。如：the, he, her, here, there, red, door, or, run, under.
62词中有词
教师给出一个单词，根据该单词中的字母，组成新单词，看谁组成的单词多，例如：late(5):a, at, ate, let, tea下列单词可供参考，括号中的数字是可组成的最低单词数：team(5),table(10),woman(10)answer(10),strong(10),mountain(20),honest(15),nothing(15),father(20),cart(5).
63反义词(同义词，对应词)拔河赛
首先要做一“拔河绳”，方法是在投影仪或磁性黑板上画一横线，中间位置画一竖线作为“界河”，左右划五个小格最外边的两个小格作为“界河线”。将一只棋子放在中心线上作为绳的中心，若没有磁性黑板，可以在黑板上横挂一绳子，绳子中间挂一红纸环作为绳的中心。然后将学生分成若干队，由其中两队进行拔河，游戏开始，甲队的第一人说出一个词，乙队的第一个人应立即说出其反义词(同义词或对应词)，要是他说对了，棋子(或红纸环)要向甲方移动一格，要是他说不出或说错了，棋子(或红纸环)要向乙方移动一格，然后乙队的第一个人说一个词，由甲队的第二人说出其反义词(同义词或对应词)，当棋子移动了五格，到达乙方界河边时，甲方胜利了。
64s名词复数拔诃赛
这个游戏的玩法和上一个游戏差不多，只是甲队第一个人说一个单词后，乙队的第一个人要说出并拼出这个单词的复数形式，胜负的确定也和上面的游戏一样。
篇11：高三英语词汇双解及用法(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Unit 1 That must be a record
Words and expressions
beard n. the hair which grows on a man's face (下巴上的)胡须；络腮胡子
Sailors often grow beards. 船员常爱留胡子。
cheetah n. 猎豹；印度豹
sailfish n. 旗鱼
voyager n. 航行者；航海者；航天者；旅客
tight adj. firm so that you can not untie or undo it easily 紧的；牢固的
These shoes are too tight----I need a bigger pair. 这鞋太紧--我需要一双大一点的。
tightrope n.[c] 拉紧的绳索/钢索
a tightrope walker 走绳索 (表演) 者
gorge a deep, narrow passage with steep rocky sides; a ravine 峡谷
the Three Gorges 三峡
edition n.[c] form in which a book is published 版本；版次
The first edition of Robinson Crusoe was printed in 1719.
《鲁滨逊漂流记》第一版是在17出版的。
moustache n.[c] 髭(蓄在上唇之须)；小胡子=(美)mustache
have [wear] a mustache [a pair of mustaches] 留着小胡子 [留着八字胡]
Urumqi [uXrumqi] n. 乌鲁木齐(即迪化,中国新疆自治区首府省会)
brewery n. an establishment for the manufacture of malt liquors, such as beer and ale
啤酒厂 pl. breweries
conclude vt. to bring or come to an end 结束
The meeting was concluded yesterday. 会议昨天结束了。
vt. come to an idea after thinking 推断出；断定
We concluded that the animal was dead as it did not move.
我们断定这只野兽是死的，因为它一动也不动。
hire vt. pay to use something, or to use someone's help 租；雇佣
He hired a car with a driver. 他租了一辆带司机的汽车。
send in send to the proper person or authority; hand in 递送；呈送；提交
Have you sent in your application? 你的申请书送上去了吗？
set down to write down; copy; record in writing or printing 写下；抄下；记下
You had better set your idea down before you forget it.
你最好在未忘记以前把你的想法写下来。
feat n. an act of skill, endurance, imagination, or strength; an achievement 技艺；本领
feats of horsemanship 马术
a notable act or deed, especially an act of courage; an exploit 功绩
a feat of arms 战功
length n.[u] the distance from one end to the other 长；长度
What is the length of the car? 这辆汽车有多长？
hectare n. a metric unit of area equal to 100 ares (2.471 acres) 公顷 [等于100公亩(2.471英亩）]（合十五市亩）
athletic adj. of, relating to, or befitting athletics or athletes 运动（员）的
athletic sports 体育运动
adj. physically strong; muscular体格健壮的
an athletic girl 身强力壮的女孩
fade vi. to lose strength, colour, freshness, etc. 凋谢；褪色
Flowers fade when they come to an end. 花儿开过就凋谢了。
vt. cause to lose colour 使褪色
The sunlight has faded my tie. 阳光晒得我的领带褪了颜色。
in a row 一个接一个地；连续不断地
sit in a row 坐成一排
in the first place adv. 首先；第一
account n. saying or writing about what happened 叙述；描写；报道
He has given me an account of what happened. 他对我讲了事情的经过。
n. a record of money owned or owed in a bank, hotel, etc. 账目；账户
A shop keeper must keep accounts. 店主必须记账。
attempt vt. to try 尝试；试图；努力
They attempted to finish the work within a month. 他们试图在一个月内完成这项工作。
n. the act of trying 企图；试图
He made an attempt to pass the exam, but it was too difficult.他试图通过考试，但考试太难了。
suitable adj. right for a person, happening, place, etc合适的；恰当的
Thick clothes are not suitable for hot weather. 厚衣服不适于热天穿。
apply for ask for 申请; 请求
He applies to the consul for a visa. 他向领事申请签证。
inspect vt. look at something carefully 检查；细看
Ted inspected the car before he bought it. 特德仔细看了那辆车之后才买。
vt. visit people or places to see that work is done well 视察；参观
Several years later, they heard that Napoleon himself was coming to inspect them.
几年以后，听说拿破仑本人要来视察他们。
confirm vt. make certain 证实；确认
The statement is confirmed by testimony. 这个说法由证据所证实了。
certificate n. piece of paper with writing that tells something about someone 证书；证明
I received this certificate when I passed the exam. 我考试及格以后领到了这份证书。
gradual adj. happening slowly and step by step; not sudden 逐渐的；逐步的
It didn't happen suddenly; the change was gradual. 这事情不是突然发生的，是逐渐变化的。
blank adj. empty; with no writing on it 空白的
Give me a blank sheet of paper, please. 请给我一张空白的纸。
n. a space left empty or to be filled in 空白处
Fill in the blank with prepositions. 用介词填空。
enthusiastic adj. with enthusiasm 热情的；热心的
The imperialists are enthusiastic about the war. 帝国主义者热衷于战争。
bid n.[c] the amount offered or proposed; an offer or proposal of a price投标；出价
Bids were invited for building the bridge. 为新桥的建造而进行招标。
vi. to make an offer to pay or accept a specified price 投标 (bid; bid)
Several companies will bid for/on the contract. 数家公司要投标争取合约。
decade n.[c] a period of 10 years十年
Prices have risen steadily during the past decade. 过去十年中价格已稳步地上涨。
committee n. small group of people chosen by others to plan and organize委员会
The bill has passed through the committee. 该提案已在委员会通过。
fascinate vt. to attact; to charm 使入迷；吸引
The monkeys in the zoo fascinated me. 动物园里的猴子使我着了迷。
burst vi. to break because of the force inside 炸破；胀破
The bag was so full that it burst open. 袋子那么满，都胀裂了。
vi. explode 爆炸
I had an accident when a tyre burst. 车胎爆了，我出了事故。
burst into begin suddenly or violently 突然开始；爆发出
They were so moved that they burst into tears. 他们都感动得哭了起来。
underline vt. draw a line under a word, sentence, etc.在（词、句子等）下面划线
Underline all the sentences you do not know. 在你不懂的句子下面划一条线。
globe n. anything round like a ball 球状物；地球；地球仪
I'm interested in studying the globe in my spare time. 闲暇时我对研究地球仪很感兴趣。
bush n.[c] plant like a short tree, with many branches灌木
My coat caught in a bush. 我的衣服被矮树丛钩往了。
n.[u] wild country with small trees 灌林地带；荒野
There is much bush in Australia and Africa. 在澳洲和非洲有许多未开发的丛林。
spaceman n. 宇航员；太空人
ramp n. an inclined surface or roadway connecting different levels. 斜面；斜坡
a place where a sharp change in level or direction occurs 弯道
skilful adj. experienced 熟练的；有技巧的；灵巧的
The child has become skillful in reading and writing. 那个小孩变得善于读写。
He is skillful with his fingers. 他的手指灵巧。
skateboard n. long piece of wood or plastic on wheels on which one stands while it runs quickly over the ground 滑板
skateboarder R n. 玩滑板的人
administration n. management, especially of business affairs; the activity of a sovereign state in the exercise of its powers or duties 经营；管理；行政
permission n.[u] allowing someone to do something允许；许可；同意
May I have permission to leave early? 可以让我早点走吗？
schoolmate n. a companion or an associate in one's school 同学；校友
They are my schoolmates. 他们是我的同学。
grandparent n. a parent of one's mother or father; a grandmother or grandfather (外）祖父（母）
recently adv. lately; not long ago 最近地；近来地
This book was published recently. 这本书是最近出版的。
familiar adj. usual, that you often see, hear, etc. 熟悉的；常见的
I am familiar with this idea. 我晓得这个意见。
The singer is familiar to every one of us. 这位歌唱家是我们大家熟悉的。
capture v. catch and hold someone or something 捕获；占领
Our army captured 1,000 of the enemy. 我军俘虏敌军一千人。
to attract and hold 吸引
tales of adventure that capture the imagination 引起想象的探险故事
centre on/upon 将某人/谋事当作中心/重点
factor n. any of the things that cause or bring about a certain result因素；要素
Time is an important factor to consider in cooking. 烹调过程中掌握时间是很重要的。
concentrate vt. bring together into one place 集中
We concentrated our forces against the enemy's position. 我们集中兵力攻击敌人的阵地。
vi. meet in a common centre 集中
He's tired and can't concentrate. 他累了，注意力不能集中。
concentrate on fix one's efforts and attention on把…集中在…上；全神贯注于
We are concentrating our efforts on socialist construction. 我们正集中力量建设社会主义。
helmet n. a head covering of hard material to protect the head头盔；钢盔；防护帽
The man on the motorcycle wore a helmet. 骑摩托车的人戴了一顶头盔。
teenage adj. of, relating to, or applicable to those aged 13 through 19 十几岁的；
青少年的
a teenage girl 一个十几岁的女孩
truly adv. really; sincerely; genuinely 真正地；真诚地；真心地
Are you truly happy in your work? 你真的对你的工作满意吗？
We are truly sorry for the inconvenience. 我们真心为不便感到抱歉
delight vt. make someone very pleased, happy, etc.给人快乐；使欣喜
Her dancing delighted everyone. 她的舞蹈使人人高兴。
n.[u] great pleasure or happiness 快乐；欣喜
She read the book with delight. 她读了这本书感到非常满意。
delighted adj. very pleased; happy高兴的；快乐的
I am delighted to see you. 见到你很高兴。
energetic adj. 精力旺盛/充沛的；充满活力的
an energetic person 精力充沛的人
an energetic performance 充满活力的演出
cautious adj. careful 小心的；谨慎的
The students should be cautious not to make any mistakes in spelling.
学生们拼写时应非常小心，以避免发生错误。
outgoing adj. eager to mix socially with others; friendly好交际的；外向的
an outgoing personality 开朗的性格
register v. to enroll officially or formally, especially in order to vote or attend classes; to set down in writing; record 登记；注册；记录
He registered the birth of his child. 他登记了孩子的出生日。
skim v. to read or glance through (a book, for example) quickly or superficially浏览；略读
The book is worth skimming through. 这本书值得浏览一下。
the Tour de France 环法自行车赛
Unit 2 Crossing limits
Words and expressions
evaluate vt. to examine and judge carefully; appraise; to ascertain or fix the value or worth of 评价；估计
The research project has only been under way for three months, so it's too early to evaluate its success. 这个研究项目进行了不过三个月,所以要对它的成绩作出评价为时尚早。
various adj. of different kinds各种各样的；不同种类的
There are various ways of cooking rice. 做米饭有各种不同的方法。
in the name of acting for 以…的名义；代表…
We're very glad to greet you in the name of the Chinese people.
我们非常高兴以中国人的名义向你们致意。
key adj. of crucial importance; significant 关键的；极重要的
key decisions 意义重大的结论 the key element of the thesis 论文的中心成分
origin n. beginning; start of anything 起源；来源
What was the origin of Man? 人类的起源是什么？
n. parentage, birth, or ancestors 出身；来历
He is a researcher of working class origin. 他是工人出身的研究员。
equip vt. put in a place, or give someone, all the tools, instruments, etc. that are needed 装备；配备
Our factory is equipped with modern machines. 我厂是用现代化机械装备的。
endeavor n. an earnest attempt 努力；尽力
We make every endeavor to satisfy our customers. 我们尽全力使顾客满意。
v. to attempt by employment of effort 努力；尽力
We must always endeavour to improve our work. 我们总要努力改进自己的工作。
puzzle n. problem; something that is difficult to understand; game where you must find an answer 难题；谜
It is a puzzle to me how he could come here. 我不知他是怎么到这里来的。
vt. make you think a lot because you do not understand it 使困惑；使糊涂
I am puzzled by the difficult question. 我被难题难住了。
wealthy adj. having much wealth富有的；富裕的
Wealthy men are not always happy. 有钱人未必总是幸福的。
Asian adj. native of Asia 亚洲(人)的
What's the difference between the Asian elephants and African elephants?
亚洲象和非洲象有什么不同
n. a native or inhabitant of Asia 亚洲人
in exchange for in the place of something that you have given to someone 交换；互换
I'll give you three sweets in exchange for an apple. 我拿三块糖换你一个苹果。
spice n. things like ginger, pepper, cinnamon, cloves, etc. that are put into food 香料；调味品（如姜、胡椒等）
Pepper is a spice. 胡椒是一种调味品。
Arab n. a native of Arabia 阿拉伯人
adj. of the Arabs or Arabia; Arabian 阿拉伯(人)的
westernmost adj. 最西 (端) 的
African n. a native or inhabitant of Africa 非洲人
adj. of or relating to Africa or its peoples, languages, or cultures 非洲(人)的
ambassador n. a diplomatic official appointed a as representative by one government to another 大使；使节
He was appointed ambassador to Japan. 他奉派为驻日大使。
Roman adj. of or relating to ancient or modern Rome or its people or culture
罗马(人)的
n. a native, inhabitant, or citizen of ancient or mod
ern Rome 罗马人
empire n. a group of countries under one ruler, usually an emperor 帝国
the Roman Empire 罗马帝国
rhinoceros n. 犀牛
horn n. a hard, pointed thing which grows on the head of some animals（羊、牛、鹿等动物的）角
Horns are usually in pairs, one on each side of the head.
角一般都是成对的，在头部两侧一边长一个。
n. an instrument for making loud warning noises 喇叭
The taxi driver blew his horn to tell us that he had arrived.
出租汽车司机按喇叭告诉我们他到了。
wander vi. to go from place to place with no special purpose 漫游；闲逛
The boys wandered around the town with nothing to do.
那些男孩无所事事，在镇上到处闲逛。
motherland n. one's native land 祖国
awareness n.[u] 觉察；意识；知道
awareness of one's ignorance 意识到自己的无知
existence n.[u] being 存在；生存
The tree owes its existence to soil. 树木依赖泥土生存。
accurate adj. conforming exactly to fact; errorless 准确的
deviating only slightly or within acceptable limits from a standard 精确的
Is this watch accurate? 这只表准吗?
navy n. all the warships of a country, with officers and men 海军
the army, navy and air force 陆、海、空军三军
treasure n. store of gold, silver, jewels, money, or other valuable things 财宝；财富
They were looking for buried treasure. 他们在寻找埋在地下的财宝。
fleet n. big groups of ships; a number of ships, airplanes, automobiles etc. moving together 舰队；船队；机群；汽车队
The Sixth Fleet of the United States Navy was ordered to the South Sea.
美国海军第六舰队受命驶向南海。
command n. an order; the act of commanding 命令；指挥
The policeman gave the command to stop. 警察下令停下。
n. ability to control; mastery 控制；精通
He has a good command of English. 他英语掌握得很好。
vt. order; control 命令；指挥；控制
The policeman commanded the car to stop. 警察命令汽车停下。
set sail (from/to/for) on a voyage 启航；扬帆
The liner set sail for New York at 8:30. 轮船在八时半启航开往纽约。
royal adj. of or relating to a monarch. 王室的；皇家的
a royal family/palace 王室/宫 a royal house 皇家
embassy n.[c] place where embassy people live and work 大使馆
To go to the United States, you must get a visa at the U.S. embassy.
你必须从美国大使馆得到签证才能去美国。
zebra n.[c] an African mammal related to the horse and having dark stripes on a light body 斑马
The zebra is a kind of horse that lives in Africa. 斑马是生活在非洲的一种马。
in return in exchange 作为回报
She presented me a dictionary in return. 她送给我一本词典作为答谢。
symbolic adj. of, relating to, or expressed by means of symbols or a symbol象征的；
符号的
The dove is symbolic of peace. 鸽子象征和平。
symbolic language 符号语言
volunteer n. someone who volunteers to do a job or to join the army 自愿者
That man is a volunteer fireman in this town. 那个人是这个镇里的志愿消防队员。
v. offer to do a job that is unpleasant, difficult, or dangerous 自愿从事
Two men volunteered to search for the missing climber.
两个人自告奋勇去寻找那位失踪的登山运动员。
radium n. a chemical element that gives off rays 镭
Radioactivity is a special quality of radium. 放射性是镭的一种特性。
sum n. an amount obtained as a result of adding numbers 总数；和
Eleven is the sum of six and five. 十一是六加五的和。
n. amount of money一笔（金额）
He paid a large sum for the house. 他出一笔巨款买了这所房子。
dam n.[c] a barrier constructed across a waterway to control the flow or raise the level of water 水坝；堤
There are several dams across the Huai River. 淮河上有几座水闸。
bring up look after and educate children, etc 教养；培养
I was brought up by my aunt. 我是我姑姑抚养成人的。
introduce to notice or consideration, mention 提出
Why don't you bring this up at the meeting? 你何不在会上提出这个问题？
horizon n. line where the earth or sea seems to meet the sky 地平线
The sun sank below the horizon. 太阳落到地平线以下了。
navigation n. the act of navigating; the passage of ships, etc. over the sea, etc. 航行；航海；航空
aerial navigation 空中航行；航空 ocean navigation 远洋航行
Korea n. peninsula in east Asia, extending south from northeast China 朝鲜；韩国
suggest vt. give someone an idea; say that something will be possible 建议；提议 I suggested that we (should) hold a meeting tonight. 我提议我们今晚开个会。
vt. bring to mind 使人想起；暗示
Smoke suggests fire. 有烟就有火。
accomplish vt. finish something; complete; carry out 完成；实现
You have accomplished a purpose. 你达到了目的。
apart from prep. with the exception of; besides 除…外；除…外还
Apart from the cost, it will take a lot of time. 除了费钱以外，还要花很多时间。
sickness n.[u] the condition of being sick; illness 疾病
Viruses and germs cause most sicknesses. 病毒与细菌引起大部分的疾病。
n.[u] be overcome by a feeling of sickness 恶心
unable adj. not able to do something不能的；不会的；无能为力的
He was unable to walk. 他不能走。
the Himalayas n. 喜马拉雅山脉
sacred adj. of god or religion; holy神圣的
A church is a sacred building. 教堂是一个神圣的处所。
Sherpa n. 夏尔巴人(西藏的一种族)
Tibet n. 西藏
honesty n. the condition or quality of being honest; freedom from deceit or cheating
诚实
(prov.) Honesty is the best policy. （谚）诚实为上策。
dedication n.[u] the act of dedicating奉献
His dedication to teaching gained the respect of his students.
他对教学的奉献得到了学生们尊敬。
n.[c] words used in dedicating a book or other work 题献；献词
The book's dedication reads “To Mother”. 本书献词写道：“献给母亲”。
ideal adj. very best, exactly right 完美的；理想的
This place is ideal for a picnic. 这个地方野餐最理想。
refer vi. speak about something 谈到；涉及；所指
This is not the dictionary which I referred to. 这不是我所指的那本词典。
vt. hand over to (someone) for a decision; send or direct to (someone or something) for help or action 呈交；提交
We refer the question to them. 我们把这个问题提交他们处理。
refer to 提到
Don't refer to that problem again, please. 请不要再提那个问题了。
run out become exhausted or used up; come to the end of a supply, etc. 被用完；耗完
The aircraft will run out of fuel in another hour. 飞机再过一小时燃料就将用完。
technological adj. 技术的
technological development 科学技术的发展
aircraft n. machine that flies; aeroplane; helicopter 飞行器；飞机
arise vi. happen; start发生；产生 (arose; arisen)
How did the quarrel arise? 争吵是怎样发生的？
vi. move upward; ascend 向上；上升
When I started off, the sun was arising. 我出发时太阳正在升起。
evidence n.[u] proof; something that shows what has happened and why it has happened 证据；证明
There is no evidence that he is guilty. 没有证据证明他有罪。
chairman n. the person who is in charge of meeting 主席；董事长
chairman of the meeting 会议主席 a bank board chairman 银行董事长
praise vt. say that something or someone is good表扬；称赞
The teacher praised Tom for his homework. 教员表扬汤姆的家庭作业做得好。
n. the act of saying that a person or a thing is good, words expressing admiration, applause
赞美；称赞 He had a lot of praise for Tom's work. 他十分称赞汤姆的工作。
Christopher Columbus [XkristRfR kRXlVmbRs] 克里斯托佛哥伦布(西班牙航海家)
Marco Polo [XmQkRu XpRulRu] 马可波罗(意大利旅行家)
Ceylon n. 锡兰(现称斯里兰卡)
Unit 3 The land down under
Words and expressions
Canberra n. 堪培拉(澳大利亚首都)
outback n. [the ～] (澳大利亚)内地 adj. 内地的
territory n. land that belongs to one government 领土；领域
This island is our territory. 这个岛是我国领土。
Queensland [‘kwI:nzlEnd] n. 昆士兰 (澳大利亚州名)
Victoria n. 维多利亚(澳大利亚州名)
Tasmania [tAz’meniE] n. 塔斯马尼亚(岛)（澳大利亚地名）
Aborigines n. (尤指澳大利亚的)土著居民
strait n. a narrow piece of water connecting two larger bodies of water 海峡
The strait is narrow. 这个海峡很窄。
Torres [‘tRrEs]Strait 托雷斯海峡
islander n. an inhabitant of an island 岛上居民
fellow adj. being of the same kind, group, occupation, society; having in common certain characteristics or interests 同事的，同类的
fellow workers 同事
n. people of the same sort, friends; a man 同类；伙伴；家伙
We are fellows at school. 我们是同学。
What a nice fellow he is! 他是个多么好的人啊！
Portuguese adj. 葡萄牙（人）的；葡萄牙语的 n. 葡萄牙人；葡萄牙语
Dutch adj. 荷兰(人)的；荷兰(语)的 n. [the ～] 荷兰人；荷兰语
claim vt. say that you should have something 要求
He can fairly claim to have more. 他可以正当地要求多给些。
vt. to say that something belongs to you 认领
I lost my umbrella, but claimed it at the lost property office.
我把伞丢了，后来在失物招领处认领回来了。
vt. state as a fact, despite objections; assert; maintain 声称
He claims to have written the article in two days. 他声称只用两天就把文章写成了。
n. a demand for something to which one has a real or supposed right 要求
They made a claim for higher pay. 他提出更高报酬的要求。
criminal n. a person who has done something seriously against law 罪犯；犯人
The judge imposes a punishment on the criminal. 法庭处罚这个罪犯。
adj. law breaking 犯罪的
Criminal parents could corrupt any child. 犯罪的父母可使孩子变坏。
govern v. to make laws for a country, to rule统治；治理
Who governs this country? 谁治理这个国家？
governor n. someone who rules a state or province 州长；省长；总督
Who is the Governor of Hong Kong? 香港总督是谁？
newcomer n. one who has only recently arrived 新来的人；新手
a newcomer to the big city 刚来到大都市的人
a newcomer to politics 政界的新人
as a consequence (of) in consequence 作为/由于……的结果；因而
She worked hard at her lessons and as a consequence got high marks.
她努力学习功课，因而得了很高的分数。
resemble vt. to exhibit similarity or likeness to 像；类似
She resembles her mother in the way she moves her hands when she talks.
她说话时打手势的动作像她妈妈。
commonwealth n. 共和国；联邦；共同体
the Commonwealth of Australia 澳大利亚联邦
diverse adj. differing one from another; different 不同的；多种多样的
have diverse interests 有多种兴趣
transform vt. change the shape of someone or something; make something look different 改变；转变
Heat can transform water into steam. 热能使水变为蒸汽。
immigration n.[u] the act of coming into a country; the place where you enter a country移民
After the Customs, you must show your passport to the office at Immigration.
通过海关之后，你必须在移民局出示你的护照。
strengthen vt. to make strong or increase the strength of 加强
The fence was strengthened with wire. 这堵围栏用金属丝加固了。
vi. to become strong or stronger 变强
Our enemy has greatly strengthened during the truce talks. 和谈期间，敌人力量已大为增强。
differ vi. not to be the same 不同；相异
I must differ from you. 我不能同意你的意见。
pronunciation n. how you say a word or words 发音
His pronunciation is very bad. 他的发音很糟。
vocabulary n.[c] all the words in a language 词汇
He has a vocabulary of only a few hundred words. 他掌握的词汇只有几百个字。
n.[c] list of words in a lesson or book 词汇表
There is an English Chinese vocabulary at the end of the book. 书末附有英汉词汇表。
n.[c] all the words that one person knows 词汇量
A young child has a small vocabulary. 小孩子的词汇量小。
mate n.[c] friend; someone who works or learns, etc. with you 伙伴；同事
His mates waited for him by the gate. 他的同事在门口等他。
n.[c] husband or wife 配偶
She has been a faithful mate to him. 她一直都是他忠实的妻子。
v. to join closely; pair. (使)密切结合；(使)配对
sheila [5Fi:lE] n. ( Australian) a girl or young woman 少女；少妇
female n.[c] woman or girl; animal that can have baby animals; plant that has fruit 女子；雌性植物
A daughter is a female child. 女儿是女性孩子。
adj. of, relating to, or denoting the sex that produces ova or bears young. 女的；女性的
wilderness n. an unsettled, uncultivated region left in its natural condition荒野；荒地
billabong n. a dead-end channel extending from the main stream of a river死河；
干河道
aboriginal adj. of or relating to aborigines 土著的
aboriginal races 原始种族
concept n. a thought; an idea; a general notion 概念；观念
A small baby has no conc ept of right and wrong. 小孩不懂什么是正确和错误。
break out start suddenly 爆发；突然发生
A fire broke out near here yesterday. 昨天此地附近发生了一场火灾。
chew vt. to bite and grind with the teeth; masticate 咀嚼
You must chew your food well before you swallow it. 你吞下食物以前必须要好好咀嚼。
vt. to meditate on; ponder 深思
The judge chewed the matter over before making a decision. 法官在判决前仔细考虑过此事。
chairwoman n. a woman presiding officer of an assembly, meeting, committee, or board 女主席；女董事长
feed ... on to serve as food for 喂养；饲养
We feed the sheep on grass. 我们给羊吃草。
koala n. 树袋熊；考拉(澳洲产无尾熊，即koala bear)
entire adj. complete; whole; without anything left out 完全的；整个的；全部的
The ship sank with the entire crew. 轮船及全体船员都沉没了。
Alaska n. 阿拉斯加(美国州名)
mine n.[c] big hole in the ground that people make when they are looking for coal,
metal, diamonds, etc. 矿井
There are many coal mines in the north. 北方有许多煤矿。
n.[c] a bomb placed in the ground or water for destroying enemy soldiers or ships 地雷
The lorry was destroyed by a land mine. 这辆卡车被一个地雷炸毁了。
v. dig for coal, gold, etc. in the ground 采矿
Gold is mined from deep under ground. 黄金是在很深的地下采的。
fence n.[c] a barrier round a garden or field 篱笆；围栏
We built a fence around the yard to keep the dog in.
为了不让狗出去我们在院子四周筑起一道篱笆。
dingo n. 澳洲野犬
round up to bring together; to collect in one place 赶拢；使集拢
They try to round up a scattered herd of cattle. 他们试图把分散的牲口赶在一起。
outdoors adv. in the open air, outside 在野外；在户外
They often worked outdoors. 他们常常在户外工作。
birthplace n. the place where someone is born or where something originates
出生地；发源地
outing n.[c] short journey to enjoy yourself 出外游玩；短途旅行
The children had plenty of outings during the summer. 孩子们夏天常外出游玩。
lemonade n. a drink made of lemon juice, water, and sugar 柠檬水
barbecue a social gathering, usually held outdoors, at which food is cooked over an open flame 户外烤肉餐；烧烤
vt. to roast or grill (meat or seafood) over live coals or an open fire 烧烤
roast vt. to cook with dry heat, as in an oven or near hot coals 烘烤
The meat is roasting. 肉正烤着。
adj. roasted 烘烤过的
roast duck. 烤鸭
steak n. a thick slice of meat or fish cut for frying, grilling, etc 肉排；鱼排 (尤指)牛排 =beefsteak
barrier n.[c] a divider between two things障碍
The police put a barrier across the road. 警察设了路障。
the Great Barrier Reef 大堡礁
logical adj. reasoning; reasonable 合逻辑的；合乎情理的
His argument seems logical. 他的论据似乎有道理 [合逻辑] 。
wombat n. 袋熊
pointed adj. with a sharp end尖的
That is a pointed stick. 那是一根尖棍。
adj. sharp; clear and direct 直截了当的；率直的
His pointed remarks about the party were not polite. 他对聚会直率的议论显得很不礼貌。
claw n. one of the pointed nails on the feet of some animals and birds; hand on a crab, etc. （禽兽）爪；脚爪；（蟹等）钳；螯
Cats have very sharp claws. 猫有着锋利的脚爪。
A crab has two claws. 螃蟹有两个钳。
v. to scratch, dig, tear, or pull with or as if with claws 搔；挠；抓
The cat clawed the chair. 猫用爪子抓椅子。
hairy covered with hair or hairlike projections 多毛的；(似)毛发的
a hairy caterpillar 一条毛茸茸的毛虫
medium adj. middle, not big and not small 中等的
He is a man of medium height. 他是一个中等身材的男人。
bushy adj. covered with bushes 灌木丛生的
Unit 4 Green world
Words and expressions
procedure n. a manner of proceeding; a way of performing 程序；手续
This is the correct procedure for obtaining a visa. 这是取得签证的正确程序/手续。
a series of steps taken to accomplish an end 步骤
a long therapeutic procedure 长期治疗过程
tulip n. 郁金香
rose n.[c] a beautiful flower, which is red, white or yellow 玫瑰(花)；蔷薇(花)
Father planted roses along one side of the garden. 父亲沿着花园的一边种了玫瑰。
You lie upon roses when young, you'll lie upon thorns when old. 少壮不努力，老大徒伤悲。
peony n.[c] 牡丹；芍药
She blushed like a peony. 她脸红得像一朵牡丹花。
strawberry n.[c] small, soft, red fruit 草莓
Her favourite fruit is strawberry. 她最喜欢的水果是草莓。
lemon n. 柠檬
a slice of lemon 一片柠檬
bunch n. a number of things of the same kind fastened or growing together 串；束
a bunch of flowers 一束花 a bunch of grapes/keys 一串葡萄/钥匙
merely adv. only仅仅；只不过
I didn't stop to speak to him--I merely smiled. 我没有停下来和他说话--我只是微微一笑。
herb n. 草药；草本植物；香草
classify vt. to arrange or organize according to class or category 分类
We usually classify types of character as good or bad.
我们通常把 (人的) 性格之类型分为善与恶。
identification n. the state of being identified 鉴别；验明
the identification of high yielding seeds 高产量种子的鉴别
n. proof or evidence of identity 身份证明(缩写 ID)
His only means of identification was his passport. 他唯一证明身份的证件就是他的护照。
male adj. of the sex that does not give birth to young ones 男（性）的；雄性的
A cock is a male bird. 公鸡是雄性家禽。
n. man or boy; animal that cannot have baby animals; plant that does not have fruit 男人；雄性动物/植物
A bull, a cock and a he goat are males. 公牛，公鸡，公羊都是雄性动物。
promote vt. to contribute to the progress or growth of 促进；推进
Kindness promotes peace. 亲切的行为可以促进和睦。
vt. to raise to a more important or responsible job or rank 提升
Our teacher has been promoted to headmaster. 我们的老师已被提升为校长了。
botanical adj. of or relating to plants or plant life; of or relating to the science of botany 植物的；植物学 (上) 的
the botanical garden(s) 植物园
privilege n. a special advantage, permission, right, or benefit granted to or enjoyed by an individual, a class 特权；优惠
Our members have the privilege of using the lending service of the library.
我们的会员有享受图书馆借书服务的特权。
cozy adj. comfortable; easy 舒适的；安逸的
I felt cozy watching the hearth fire. 看着炉火我感到温暖而舒适。
appetite n. a desire for food 食欲；胃口
Exercises give one a good appetite. 运动增进食欲。
n. a strong wish or liking 爱好；欲望
He has an appetite for writing. 他好从事写书。
wealth n.[u] (lots of) money; valuable things 财富；财产
Some were owners of great wealth and property. 有些人拥有万贯家财。
Oceania n. the Pacific Islands 大洋洲
appointed vt. to select or designate to fill an office or position 任命；委派
We must appoint a new teacher at once to the mountain school.
我们必须立即委派一名新教师到那山村小学去。
vt. to fix or set by authority or by mutual agreement 约定；指定
They appointed a place to exchange stamps. 他们约定一个地方交换邮票。
Venus n. the second planet from the sun 金星
n. (Roman Mythology) the goddess of sexual love and physical beauty
维纳斯(罗马神话中爱与美的女神)
the V of Milo 米罗的维纳斯雕像
calculate vt. find an answer by working with numbers 计算
Let me calculate the cost of the journey. 让我计算一下旅途的用费。
astronomy n. the scientific study of matter in outer space 天文学
expense n. the act of spending money; cost; money used or needed for sth.花费；
支出；代价；费用
The expense of running a car has risen recent years.近几年来使用汽车的费用增加了。
look our for to be careful of 当心；注意；警惕
Look out (for the car)! 留神(汽车)！
on a large scale 大规模地；大范围地
cocoa n. brown powder from the beans of a tree, made into chocolate 可可粉
n. drink that you make with cocoa powder and milk 可可茶
hemp n. 大麻
involve vt. to contain as a part; include 包括；涉及
All the children were involved in the school play. 所有的孩子都参加了学校排练的剧。
vt. to engage as a participant 使牵涉；使卷入；使参与
Don't involve other people in your trouble. 别把别人牵涉进你的麻烦中去。
enterprise ] n. an undertaking, especially one of some scope, complication, and risk; a business organization 事业；企业
government enterprise 公/国营企业 private enterprise 私/民营企业
small-to-medium-sized enterprises 中小企业
settlement n. group of homes in a place where no people have lived before 拓居地；定居点
The first settlements were on the east coast of America. 最初的殖民地是在美洲的东海岸。
n. agreeing about something after discussing it 解决（方案）
After long talks about pay, the managers and workers reached a settlement.
就工资进行长期谈判后，劳资双方达成一项解决办法。
Kew [kju:] n. 克佑(伦敦之西郊,为皇家植物园之所在地)
accumulate vt&i. to gather or pile up; amass; to mount up; increase
积累；聚集
He accumulated a fortune by hard work. 他靠努力工作积蓄了一笔财富。
Snow accumulated to a depth of 10 feet. 雪已积到十尺深。
abandon vt. leave someone or something; give up; desert 离弃；放弃；抛弃
The driver abandoned his car in the snow. 司机把汽车抛在雪地里。
straw n. dry, cut stalks of wheat, etc. 稻草；麦秆
Everyone of us had a straw hat on. 我们人人都戴草帽。
n. thin tube of paper or plastic for drinking a cold drink 麦管；吸管
He sucked Coke through a straw. 他用吸管吸可口可乐。
pineapple n. 凤梨；波萝
year after year adv. 年年；一年又一年(= year in year out)
We have visited this island year in year out and we never get bored.
我们在这个岛上参观很长时间，但我们没有厌烦。
classification n. the act or result of classifying; a category or class分类；类别
pass away die 去世
He passed away during the night. 他在晚间逝世。
Oxford n. 牛津[英国牛津郡 (Oxford shire) 的首府, 为牛津大学 (Oxford又作Oxford University) 所在地]
tone n. a sound; the quality of a sound; the voice, as expressing feeling音调；语调
She spoke in an angry tone. 她用恼怒的口气说话。
reward n. present or money that you give to thank someone for something 报酬；报答
He was given a reward for passing the examination. 他因考试及格而得到奖品。
He worked hard all his life but without much reward. 他辛勤一生，但得到的报酬却很少。
vt. give something in return for 酬谢；奖赏
He was well rewarded by the kind things people said about him.
人们表扬了他，这就是对他很好的奖励。
name… after 给……取名；命名
technician n. expert who works with machines, instruments or tools技术员；技师
Charles Darwin 查理士达尔文(英国自然科学家) beagle n. 小猎犬
nowhere adv. at, in, or to no place; not anywhere 任何地方都不；什么地方也没有
He was nowhere to be found. 什么地方也找不到他。
n. an unknown place 不知道的地方：
a cabin in the middle of nowhere 不知在什么中心的小屋
altogether adv. on the whole; all things considered 总共；总而言之
There were five of us altogether. 我们共有五人。
Altogether, the book is quite interesting. 总的说来，这本书相当有趣。
adv. totally; completely 完全；全部地
Some of what you say is true, but I don't altogether agree.
你说的有些是真的，但我不能全都同意。
finch n．雀科鸣禽
beak n. 鸟嘴
appearance n. what someone or something looks like 外貌；外表
Do not judge by appearances. 别从外貌判断事物。
n. being seen; coming 显露；出现
At the sight of his appearance on the stage, the hall rang with thunderous applause.
他一出场，礼堂里就掌声雷动。
output n.[u] amount of things that you have made 产量；产品
We must increase our output to meet people's needs. 我们必须增加产量来满足人们的需要。
dandelion n. 蒲公英
latter adj. 后者
Of the two, the former is better than the latter. 两者之中前者较后者为佳。
distinguish vt.& vi. show the difference in; show the difference; make a distinction 区别；辨别
He could not distinguish cotton from wool. 他不能辨认是棉花还是羊毛。
You are confusing things, let me distinguish. 你把事情越弄越糟，让我来把它区分出来。
in detail with all the facts 详细地
The teacher explained the text in detail. 老师详细地解释了课文。
millimeter [`milimitE] n. 毫米
Carl Linnaeus [`kB:l li`nI:Es] 卡尔林尼厄斯(瑞典植物学家)
Daniel Solander [ sE`lAdE] 丹尼尔索兰德(瑞典植物学家)
Tahiti n. 塔希提岛(位于南太平洋)
Galapagos [gE`lApEgEs] n. 加拉帕戈斯(群岛)
Gregor Mendel [`gregE `mendl] 格雷戈门德尔(奥地利遗传学家)
Gote Turesson [`ge:tE tE`ri:sn] 约特杜尔松(瑞典植物学家)
Unit 5 Getting the message
Words and expressions
convey vt. carry; take from one place to another; transport 传送；运载
A bus conveys passengers from the train to the boat. 一辆公共汽车把旅客从车站送到码头。
vt. serve as a means of carrying; conduct; transmit 转达；表达
Please convey my thanks to your wife. 请向你的妻子转达我的谢意。
advertise vt. to make public announcement of, especially to proclaim the qualities or advantages of (a product or business) so as to increase sales 做广告
It has been advertised in the magazine. 已在杂志上刊登了广告。
vi. to call the attention of the public to a product or business做广告
The company advertised for a new secretary. 公司登广告招聘一名新秘书。
advertiser n. 广告商；登广告者
The report gives advertisers a new picture of women today.
这份报告使广告商对今日妇女有了新的认识。
brand n.[c] a trademark or distinctive name identifying a product or a manufacturer商标；牌子
What brand of soap do you like? 你喜欢什么牌子的肥皂？
consideration n.[u] thinking about something 考虑
After much consideration, I accepted the offer. 经过仔细考虑我接受了这个提议。
n.[u] being thoughtful and careful about people's feeling 体谅；关心
We should have consideration for the rights of others. 我们应当为别人的权利着想。
take …into consideration 考虑……
charge n. words that a policeman says when he catches someone who has done wrong 指控；控告
The man went to court on a charge of stealing. 这人被指控盗窃，进了法院。
n. payment asked for something 收费；要价
These books are free of charge. 这些书是免费的。
n. responsibility; trust 责任；委托
I put the children in your charge. 我将孩子委托你照顾。
in charge of 负责
I am in charge of this department. 我负责这一部门。
loss n. losing 丧失；丢失
He told the police about the loss of his car. 他告诉警察他的小汽车丢了。
n. something that is lost; waste 损失；浪费
His death is a great loss to the country. 他的逝世对国家是一个巨大的损失。
blame vt. to say that a person did something wrong 责怪
The driver was not to blame for the traffic accident. 那次交通事故不应该责怪司机。
n. the state of being responsible for a fault or an error; culpability 责备；谴责
The car driver took the blame for the accident. 汽车的司机承担了事故的责任。
mislead to lead into error of thought or action, especially by intentionally deceiving 使误解；使误入歧途
Don't let his friendly manner mislead you into trusting him.
不要让他那种友好的态度使你误信他。
misleading adj. tending to mislead 使人误解的；欺骗的
Your words were rather misleading. 你所说的话颇容易引起误解。
broadcast vt. to send out or communicate, especially by radio or television播放；播出 (broadcast, broadcasted; broadcast, broadcasted)
The agency broadcast an urgent appeal for medical supplies.
代理商通过电台紧急呼吁要求药品供应。
vi. to transmit a radio or television program for public or general use; to be on the air播放(节目)
The station begins broadcasting at 6 a.m. 电台早晨 6:00开始播音
post vt. fasten (a notice) up in a place where it can easily be seen 张贴
The names of the members of the team will be posted up today.今天将贴出这个队成员的名单。
hand in hand holding each other's hands; together 手拉手；共同地
They walked away hand in hand. 他们手拉手地离去了。
react vi. to act in response to or under the influence of a stimulus or prompting:反应；作出反应
Our eyes react to light. 我们的眼睛对光起反应。
vi. 反对；反抗[against]
The people soon reacted against the cruel system. 人们不久便起来反抗暴政。
annoy vt. to cause slight irritation to (another) by troublesome, often repeated acts
使生气；使烦恼
These flies are annoying me. 这些苍蝇真让人讨厌。
vi. to be annoying 招人讨厌；惹人烦恼
A fly keeps annoying. 一只苍蝇总在烦我。
annoying adj. causing vexation or irritation; troublesome 讨厌的；恼人的
an annoying cough 一声恼人的咳嗽
critic n.[c] a person who is critic by profession 批评家，评论家
These critics have agreed to his arguments. 这些评论家已同意他的论点。
accuse vt. charge with doing something wrong or having broken the law 控告；告发
She accused him of theft. 她控告他行窃。
associate vt. to connect or join together; combine联合；结合；联系
They are associated with him in business. 他们在工作上与他有关系。
vi. to connect in the mind or imagination 联想
What do you associate with such a heavy snow? 这样一场大雪你有什么联想?
get across (a viewpoint, etc.) become clear or understandable; make(a viewpoint,etc.)clear or understandable 被人理解；传播
He got his meaning across. 他把意思讲清楚了。
appeal vi. to make an earnest or urgent request, as for help恳求；呼吁
The government is appealing to everyone to save water. 政府呼吁每个人节约用水。
vi to make or apply for an appeal 上诉，申诉
The victims' families of the murder have appealed to the Supreme Court.
谋杀案的被害家属已经上诉最高法院。
vi. to be attractive or interesting 有感染力；有吸引力
Does the idea of working for a venture company appeal to you?
你有没有兴趣到合资企业去工作?
n. an earnest or urgent request, entreaty, or supplication 呼吁；恳求
n. a resort or application to a higher authority, as for sanction, corroboration, or a decision
呼吁；上诉
a court of appeal 上诉法庭 a direct appeal 直接上诉
n. the power of attracting or of arousing interest 吸引力；感染力
a city with appeal for tourists 对游客有吸引力的城市
appeal to v. 呼吁；上诉；有吸引力
He appealed to us for support. 他恳求我们的支持。
This poem makes an appeal to the emotions. 这首诗有动人情感的力量 [有感染力] 。
frequent adj. common, habitual, repeated many times 常常发生的；频繁的
Snows are frequent in this area during December. 这个地区十二月下雪是常事。
figure n.[c] a written sign for a number 数字
The figures are not accurate. 这些数字不精确。
n.[c] how much money something costs 价格
We bought the house for a high figure. 我们高价买了这栋房子。
n.[c] a shape or drawing 图形；画像
That is a geometrical figure. 那是个几何图形。
n.[c] shape of a person or animal in stone, metal, or wood 塑像，雕像
This is the figure of Lu Xun in marble. 这是鲁迅的大理石雕像。
n.[c] a person, a character, 人物
He was one of the great figures in history. 他是历史上的伟大人物之一。
salesman n. someone whose job is to sell goods售货员；推销员
The salesman showed her nearly all the hats in the shop.
该店员几乎将店中所有帽子都拿给她看了。
saleswoman n.女售货员；女推销员
profit n. the return received on a business undertaking after all operating expenses have been met盈利；利润
Newspapers make a profit from [out of] the advertisements they carry.
报纸由其所刊登的广告获取利益。
v. 有利/益于
A wise person profits by [from] his mistakes. 智者由自己的过失中得到教益。
It will not profit you to do so. 那样做对你不会有益处的。
campaign n. a battle战役
a campaign to take the enemy city 攻克敌人城市的战役
n. a movement with a political or business purpose （政治或商业上的）运动；活动
a campaign to stop people drinking when they drive 禁止人们在开车时饮酒的运动
an advertising campaign 广告活动
vi. take part or serve in a campaign 从事活动；参加运动
They campaigned for human rights. 他们参加了人权运动。
policy n.[c] the general plan of a government, business, company, etc. 方针；政策
What is the government policy on education? 政府的教育政策是什么？
n. a course of conduct; a plan of action 计策
Honesty is the best policy. 诚实是上策。
spokesman n. a man who speaks on behalf of another or others发言人；代言人
spokeswoman n. a woman who speaks on behalf of another or others
女发言人；女代言人
illegal adj. wrong, not allowed by law 不合法的；犯法的
It is illegal to drive when you are drunk.. 喝醉了酒开车是违法的。
keep an eye out for 当心；警惕
bait n. 诱饵；鱼饵
target n. what you are trying to hit when you shoot a bullet or arrow 靶子；目标
The hunter's target was a wild animal. 这个猎人的目标是一只野兽。
n. something we aim to do or get 目标；指标
This book will be the target of bitter criticism. 这书会成为严格批评的对象。
bullet n.[c] a shot fired from a gun 子弹；枪弹
Every bullet has its billet. 每颗子弹都有归宿。
sneaker n. a sports shoe usually made of canvas and having soft rubber soles运动鞋
nutritional l adj. 营养(品)的
nowadays [`nauEdeiz] adv. during the present time; now 现在；当今
Nowadays, advertisements can be found everywhere in any big city.
现在,在任何一个大城市里,到处都可以看到广告。
nephew n. son of your brother or sister 侄子；外甥
He was a nephew of my friend. 他是我朋友的侄子。
waitress n.[c] a woman or girl who serves food in a restaurant女服务员
The waitress is bringing the soup. 女服务员正把汤端来。
hostess n. a female host; the wife of the host女主人
The hostess brought us out a pot full of steaming coffee.
女主人给我们拿出一满壶热气腾腾的咖啡。
bridegroom n. a man who is about to be married or has recently been married新郎
heroine n. most important woman in a story, play, etc. 女主角；女主人公
n. very brave woman or girl女英雄
goddess n. female god 女神
Venus was a goddess worshipped by the Romans. 维纳斯是罗马人信奉的女神。
promotion n. the act of promoting or the fact of being promoted促进；促销
the promotion of learning 学术的促进
n. advancement in rank or responsibility 晋升
Our teacher has got a promotion. 我们的老师被提升了。
attach vt. to fasten, secure, or join系；附；粘[to, on]
The clerk attached a price tag to each article. 店员给每一件商品系上标价签。
vt to adhere, belong, or relate.附属 [to]
This hospital is attached to our medical department. 这所医院附属于我们医学系。
vt. to ascribe or assign 认为有（重要性等）
attached no significance to the threat 不重视这种威肋
legend n. an unverified story handed down from earlier times, especially one popularly believed to be historical 传奇；传说
There is a legend that… 有一个传说,说是…。
slogan n. a phrase expressing the aims or nature of an enterprise, an organization, or a candidate; a motto标语；口号
a phrase used repeatedly, as in advertising or promotion 广告语
catchy adj. attractive or appealing 吸引人的
a catchy idea for a new television series 为一部新电视系列剧出的吸引人的主意
adj. tricky; deceptive 有圈套的；欺骗的：
a catchy question on an exam 考试中设有陷阱的题目
point out tell about or show something 指出
He pointed out the importance of the work. 他指出这一工作的重要性。
discount vt. to sell or offer for sale at a reduced price 打折
n. a reduction from the full or standard amount of a price or debt 折扣
n. attributive. often used to modify another noun（定语名词）
a discount market; discount merchandise 打折商场；打折商品
make sense have a meaning that you can understand 有意义；讲得通
I can't follow these instructions----they don't make sense.
我不理解这些指示--根本讲不通嘛。
bonus n. something given or paid in addition to what is usual or expected 额外给予的东西
n. a sum of money or the equivalent given to an employee in addition to the employee's usual compensation 奖金
n. a sum of money in addition to salary that is given to a professional athlete for signing up with a team 津贴
Those who put in many hours of overtime will receive a percentage of their salary as a bonus.
那些付出许多加班时间的人将得到相当于其工资的一部分作为奖金。
context n.[c] the parts directly before or after a word or sentence上下文
We can often tell the meaning of a word from its context.
由上下文，我们可以知道一个字的意思。
Tetsuya Komuro [`testjB: `kRmurEu] 小室哲哉
Unit 6 Going west
Words and expressions
perseverance n. steady persistence in adhering to a course of action, a belief, or a purpose; steadfastness 毅力；坚持
Great works are performed, not by strength, but perseverance.
伟大的作品不是靠力量而是靠毅力来完成的。
quit vt. to give up; abandon 放弃
He has not quit smoking, but is holding down to three cigarettes a day.
他并没有戒烟,但是已减到每天只抽三支烟了。
vt. to depart from; leave 离开
You and I are on the point of quitting the theater of our exploits.
你我正在离开我们辉煌业绩的舞台。
vt. to cease or discontinue 停止；中断：
The teacher asked them to quit talking. 老师要求他们不要说话。
apply (…) to … use; put into practice 应用；运用
We should apply theory to practice. 我们应当把理论运用到实践中去。
add up find the total of 总计；加起来
Add up 6,7 and 8 and you'll get 21. 把六、七、八相加，总数是二十一。
circumstance n. a condition or fact attending an event and having some bearing on it 环境；情况(常用复数形式)
It depends on [upon] circumstances. 这要视情况而定。
lose heart become discouraged 沮丧；灰心
Don't lose heart at any failure, but try again. 失败时不要灰心，要再接再厉。
assessment n. the act of assessing; appraisal 评估；估价
environmental assessment 环境影响评估
take it easy 放松些；别紧张
When the teacher found some of his students get nervous at the examination, he told them to take it easy. 老师发现一些学生考虑时焦急不安，就叫他们不要紧张。
keep up retain(one's spirits, strength, etc); (one's spirits, strength, etc.)not decline 维持；保持
The mountaineers' spirits kept up against heavy odds.
在非常不利的条件下，登山运动员们仍然情绪高涨。
Robinson Crusoe n. 鲁滨逊克鲁索
common sense natural good thinking 常识；情理
Although she's not very clever she's got lots of common sense. 她虽然不很聪明，但很有见识。
survival n. the act of surviving; continuance of life 幸存；存活
He stayed eight days in an open boat with no food, and he was still alive; his survival was a miracle. 他在无遮档的小船上呆了八天，又无食物，还活下来了，这真是个奇迹。
biscuit n. a small cake of shortened bread leavened with baking powder or soda饼干；小点心
alcohol n. a colorless, volatile, flammable liquid; intoxicating liquor containing alcohol 酒精；含酒精的饮料
goat n. a sort of hollow-horned, bearded ruminant mammals of mountainous regions山羊
On the ground lay an old sick goat. 地上躺着一只生病的老山羊。
flour n.[u] a powder made from wheat and used to make bread and cakes 面粉（或其他谷物磨成的粉）
Flour is used in making breads and cakes. 面粉用来做面包或糕饼。
axe n. 斧子
nail n. the hard substance at the end of a finger or toe 指甲；趾甲
Our fingernails need cutting now and again. 我们的手指甲有时需要剪一剪。
n. small piece of metal with one pointed end, which you hit into wood to fasten things together 钉子
The nail went right through the wall. 钉子直接穿过墙壁。
razor n. a sharp-edged cutting instrument used especially for shaving the face or removing other body hair 剃刀；刮胡刀
bedding n. bedclothes 寝具；床上用品
beyond prep. on the further or other side of 在较远的一边；在另一边
The post office is beyond the bridge. 邮局在桥的那一头。
prep. (of time)later than; more advanced than（时间）晚于；超过
Some shops keep open beyond midnight. 有些商店营业到半夜以后。
prep. out of the reach of; outside one's understanding 为…不能及；超出…理解力之外
He was beyond the help of the teacher. 他使老师束手无策。
prep. (negative and interrogative) except 除…之外
I know nothing beyond this. 除这之外，我什么也不知道。
adv. farther away 在远处
look beyond 向远处看
the Rocky Mountains 落基山脉
wagon n.[c] cart on four wheels, which a horse or an ox pulls; an open railway freight car 四轮马车（牛车）；无篷铁路货车
The wagon was full of vegetables. 这辆运货马车装满了蔬菜。
leave behind cause to remain behind; forget to take or bring along; abandon in a retreat 留下；忘带
She left her bag behind in the train. 她把提包丢在列车上了。
ox n. (pl. oxen) bull used for farm work公牛；耕牛
He is as strong as an ox. 他像牛一样强壮。
Kansas n. 堪萨斯州(美国洲名)
frontier n.[c] the border, the line between two countries国境；边境
We must show our passports at the frontier. 在边境我们必须出示护照。
lose one’s way become lost 迷路；迷失
Lily lost her way in the woods. 莉莉在森林里迷了路。
barren adj. lacking vegetation, especially useful vegetation 不毛的；贫瘠的
The desert is barren land. 沙漠是贫瘠的土地。
salty adj. tasting of salt; containing salt 盐的；咸的；含盐的
Sea water is salty. 海水是咸的。
pond n. a body of still water smaller than a lake池塘
There is a flock of waterfowls on the pond. 池塘上有一群水鸟。
patch n. small piece of ground 小块地
They grow their own vegetables on a small patch of ground. 他们在一小块土地上自种蔬菜。
n. pieces of cloth that you put over a hole in clothing, sheets, etc. 补钉
I sewed a patch over the hole in my jeans. 我给我工装裤上的洞打了个补钉。
burden n. something that you carry; a heavy load 负担；包袱
It is a burden to the people. 这对人民是一种负担。
n. a duty which is hard to do well 责任
The burden fell on me. 责任落在我身上。
desperate adj. having no hope and ready to do any wild or dangerous thing 绝望的；不顾一切的
The prisoners became desperate in their attempts to escape. 那些囚犯拼命企图逃亡。
adj. very serious 极严重的；危急的
The country is in a desperate state and we must work hard.
国家处于危急关头，我们应当努力工作。
beast n. an animal （四足）兽；牲畜
The tiger is a beast of prey. 老虎是食肉兽。
accustomed adj. being in the habit of习惯[于…]的[to]
I am not accustomed to walking long distances. 我不习惯于长距离的步行。
thirst n.[u] wanting to drink something; a strong desire 渴；渴望
I drank a cup of tea to relieve my thirst. 我喝了一杯茶止渴。
The artist thirsted for fame. 艺术家想出名。
starvation n. suffering or death caused by extreme hunger 挨饿；饿死
The cat died of starvation. 那只猫饿死了。
anxiety n.[c] worry and fear 忧虑；担心；焦急
We waited with anxiety for our examination results. 我们焦急地等待考试结果。
n.[c] something that makes you worried and afraid 担心的事；焦虑
He has been relieved of his anxieties. 他已消除了忧虑。
shallow adj. not deep; with not much water 浅的
The river is shallow here; we can walk across. 这里河水很浅，我们可以趟过去。
came to an end stop结束；终止
All good things must come to an end. 一切好事迟早都会结束。（天下没有不散的宴席。）
legendary adj. based on, or of the nature of a legend 传奇的；传说的
tax n. money that the government takes from your pay or from the sale of some goods 税
There is a large tax on cigarettes. 香烟的税很重。
anniversary n. the annually recurring date of a past event, especially one of historical, national, or personal importance 周年纪念；周年纪念日
Anchorage n. 安克雷奇（美国港市）
Nome [nEum] n. 诺姆（美国城市）
front-page [.frQnt `peidV] adj. worthy of coverage on the front page of a newspaper 头版的
front-page news 头版新闻
granddaughter n.[c] the daughter of your child孙女；外孙女
flu n. influenza 流行性感冒
He caught the flu. 他患了流行性感冒。
throat n. the front part of the neck 喉咙；咽喉
I have something stuck in my throat. 我有什么东西刺入了我的喉内。
diphtheria n.［医］白喉［症］
vaccine n. 痘苗；疫苗
catastrophe n. terrible thing that happens suddenly 大灾难；大祸
The forest fire was a catastrophe. 那场森林火灾是场大灾难。
relief n. the removal or ease of worry, pain ,etc. 解除；减轻
The medicine brought me relief. 这药减轻了我的痛苦。
n. help given to people in poverty of trouble 救济
They are in need of relief. 他们需要救济。
deliver vt. take something to the place where it must go 投递；送交
Every day the milkman delivers milk to our house. 每天送牛奶的人都把牛奶送到我家。
vt. give forth in words 发言
He delivered a speech at the meeting. 他在会上讲了话。
vt. to help in the birth of 接生
she delivered the child. 她接生了这孩子。
Nenana [ni`nB:nB:] n. 美国城市
Arctic adj. of the north polar regions 北极的
n. the regions round the north pole 北极；北极圈；北极地方
the Arctic Ocean 北冰洋 the Arctic Regions 北极地区
tough adj. able to withstand great strain without tearing or breaking; strong and resilient 坚韧的 demanding or troubling; difficult 困难的 physically hardy; rugged 强壮的
(tougher; toughest)
wrap vt. to cover completely with 包裹；缠绕
I wrapped the present in red paper. 我把礼物用红纸包了起来。
n.[c] an article of dress to be folded round a person 披在身上的衣物
Don't forget your wra
篇12：Teaching plan for Unit13 (人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用表示“提供和拒绝帮助”的常用语；复习句子的成分---- 主语；了解纽约的发展历史和土著人被压迫的历史。
Importance and difficulty:
1. words and expressions
a handful of , worth, tear down, pass through, take possession of, die out ,turn away, now that
2. sentences:
A. Today Native Americans express their anger over this business deal.
B. This is because the surface of the earth is not flat but round.
C. Now that they could ride horses, it became easier to hunt the bison.
D. This in return had and effect of the food supply for wolves.
3. Grammar-----Subject
A. The first settlers on the plains were farmers.
B. The killing of the bison changed the whole wild life of the plains.
C. Whether he will come or not is unknown.
D. To see is to believe.
E. The learned should be respected.
4. Useful expressions:
A. Can I help you?
B. What can I do for you?
C. Let me….
D. Would you like …
E. Thanks….
F. That’s very kind of you.
G. That’s very kind of you, but…
Lesson 49 New York
Aims and demands: Develop the Ss’ reading ability
Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text
Teaching methods: reading ,discussing, exercises
Learning methods: To read independently , try to guess it meaning according to the text
Teaching aids: tape recorder and some slides
Procedure:
Step 1. New words
Step 2. Warming up
Find out how much the Ss know about the USA
T: As we have learnt in Book 3A . There is one word which you must learn before you visit the USA. What is it ?
Ss: Freeze.
T: What does it mean?
Ss: Stand still and don’t move.
1. What is the capital of the USA? ( Washington. D C )
2. Who is the president of the USA?
3. Name three past presidents of the USA?
4. In which city is the tallest building? ( Chicago )
5. How many states are there in the USA? ( 50, 48+Alaska and Hawaii )
6. Which American president brought and end to slavery and was shot in a theatre?
(Abraham Lincoln)
7. What was the gold rush?
The time when thousands of people went to California to look for gold.
8. Where are the two Disneylands?
( Los Angeles and Florida.)
9. What is the name of the center of the film industry in Los Angeles? ( Hollywood )
10. What prize is given to film actors and directors? ( An Oscar )
Step 3. Fast reading
Read the text fast to get a general idea. And tell which of the following subjects are mentioned in the text? ( text book )
Population History Government Sports Weather Transport Parks Buildings
Step 4. Careful reading
Find out the facts that happened in the following years and give a description of the development of New York.
1. In 1524 : an Italian explorer discovered a group of islands on the east coast of the USA at a point where several rivers flow into the ocean.
2. In 1626 : the island of Manhattan was bought from local Indians , Native Americans , for a handful of goods worth about $24.
3. From 1789 to 1790: New York became the capital of the USA .
4. By 1820 : the population of New York had grown to about 125,000 , making it the largest city in the USA.
5. In 1858 : an area of poor housing, factories and farm buildings was torn down and Central Park was created.
6. In 1892 : the age of mass arrivals began and 15 million new people passed through Ellis Island into the USA over a period of 62 years.
7. Around the year 1900 : the building of skyscrapers in New York began.
8. In 1913 : a 55-storey building went up.
9. In 1931 : the Empire State Building was completed and it was the tallest building in the world then.
Step 5. Discussion ( P.2 )
Step 6. Workbook ( Lesson 49)
Step 7. Comprehension exercises:
Reading comprehension for 3 B Unit 13 ( Lesson 49) CDBCD BDDC
1. The passage is about _____.
A. about the history of New York
B. about the development of buildings in New York
C. a brief introduction to New York
D. about the characteristics of New York
2. Which one is not true?
A. New York is a harbour.
B. New York was owned by the local Indians.
C. New York was the capital of the USA.
D. New York is the political center of the USA.
3. “Native Americans” are _____.
A. American citizens B. local Indians
C. black people D. New York citizens
4. Which sentence is true?
A. Central Park is a natural park.
B. Central Park is a good place to study in.
C. Central Park is an entertainment center.
D. Central Park is a perfect place for rollerskating.
5. The age of mass arrivals began in ____.
A. eighteenth century
B. the early eighteenth century
C. nineteenth century
D. the late nineteenth century
6. The phrase “turn away” in paragraph 3 means___.
A. send away B. refuse to admit
C. cause to return D. drive out
7. “New York never sleeps.” Means ____.
A. people in New York work the whole day.
B. people in New York enjoy night life very much
C. New York is always noisy
D. all kinds of services are offered at night in New York
8. That the buildings in Manhattan become higher and higher cannot prove that ____.
A. the competition is becoming more fierce
B. more and more business and trade take place there
C. the building technology is becoming more advanced
D. New York is a good place for people to live in
9. People are of different opinions that New York is a city of ____.
A. short history B. heavy transportation
C. only one culture D. big population
Homework: ABC
Lesson 50 THE BISON ON THE PLAINS OF AMERICA
Aims and demands : Develop the students’ listening , speaking, reading and writing ability
Importance and difficulty : Have a good understanding of the text
Teaching methods: intensive reading
Teaching aid: text book , some slides, pictures
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
1. Check the homework Exercises:
2. ask some questions: comprehension exercises
Step 2. Presentation
Now more and more people went to America. Do you know how first people went to America?
Step 1. Presentation
Review something about Australia.
1. Do you remember how the first people come to Australia?
The first people crossed into Australia from Asia on a great land bridge when the water level of the oceans was lower.
2. What were they once called?
In the past they were known as “ aborigines”, which means “ the first people of a country”.
3. What are they called now?
They are now known as Kooris.
4. How did they make a living ?
They made a living by hunting and picking fruits from the trees.
5. What are the famous animals in Australia? (which are disappearing)
Kangaroo, Koala , dingo…
T: Then how about America?
6. How did the first people come to America?
They arrived by crossing a land bridge from Asia to America.
7. Who were the first settlers in America?
Native Americans Who were known as local Indians.
8. How did they make a living ?
They made a living by hunting and killing wild animals, by gathering foots, nuts and wild fruits.
9. What kind of animal is very famous but it is disappearing now? ( bison / bisons / wild horses)
T: Today we are going to learn Lesson 50----- THE BISON ON THE PLAINS OF AMERICA
Step 2. Reading
Read the text and find out: Which words and phrases do the woods in bold in the text refer to?
Step 3. Careful reading
Read the text again and do the comprehension
Step 4. Diagram completion
Step 5. Workbook ---- Ex 2
Step 6. Questions:
1. In what ways did the settlers treat the Native Americans unfairly?
The settlers killed them, forced them to leave their hunting grounds, broke agreements which they had made, forced them onto poor land, and killed most of the bison on which Native Americans had relied for food.
2. What caused a big change in the wildlife on the plains?
The killing of large numbers of bison changed the whole wildlife chain on the plains.
Step 7. Comprehension exercises
Homework:
Reading comprehension for 3B Unit 13 Lesson 50 ACCDD DABD
1. What’s the general idea of this text?
A. While the settlers moved westwards, their killing of great numbers of bison destroyed the Native Americans life as well as the balance of the plains of America
B. The bison on the plains of America lived a poor life.
C. The struggles between the settlers and the Native Americans were fierce.
D. Settlers ruined Native Americans’ life.
2. Which is not true?
A. The Native Americans’ life depended on nature.
B. The Native Americans lived a hard life.
C. The Native Americans grew grains and raised animals.
D. The Native Americans lived a free life.
3. What brought by the settlers was ( were) good for the Native Americans?
A. Their culture. B. Their trade.
C. Their horses D. Their railways.
4. Bison was a treasure for Native Americans because _____.
A. they used bison to make themselves more beautiful
B. they used bison to carry goods
C. they used bison to make money
D. they couldn’t live without bison
5. “Object” in paragraph 3 means ____.
A. subject B. fight C. agree
D. say or do something against
6. The settlers’ killing of lots of bison had __purposes.
A. 1 B. 2 C. no D. 3
7. The settlers’ killing of the bison made ____.
a. settlers get a lot of money
b. Native Americans lose more land
c. Native Americans live a poor life
d. Nature lose its balance
A. a,b,c,d B. a,b,d C. b,c D. d
8. The change in number of bison had a great effect on the plains because ___.
A. bison was the most important part in the wildlife chain
B. bison was one part in the wildlife chain
C. bison was very important to the Native Americans
D. bison was very important to the grass and soil
9. This text is ____.
A. an animal story B. an old tale
B. a historical story
D. an animal story as well as a historical story
Lesson 49~50 Language practice
Exercises: Fill in the blanks or complete the sentences or translate the sentences:
Exercises for Lesson 49
1. The little boy got a handful of rice to feed the chickens.
2. Only a handful of people attended the dance/ ball.
3. He bought a book worth over $10.
4. New York is a city worth a visit / visiting.
be worth sth
be worth doing
非常值得参观 well worth a visit / visiting
well worthy of a visit / visiting
5. By 1820 the population of New York had grown to about 125,000 ,making it the largest city in the USA.
6. 到昨天下午5点钟（以前），他们已经做了一半的工作。
By 5 p.m yesterday they had already done half of the work.
7. 到下个星期天我们将完成这项工作。
By next Sunday we’ll have finished the job.
8. 杰克只学不玩，这使得他成为一个呆笨的孩子。
Jack had all work but no play, making him a dull boy.
9. The workmen tore town the old houses and built a new one in its place.
10. Behind our school is a vegetable garden, reaching down to the river. (延伸到河边)
11. He passed through the doorway and entered the room.
12. His grandpa went through many dangers during the war. （经历了许多危险）
13. They would go through fire and water （赴汤蹈火）to serve the people.
14. Because the hall was full, many people were turned away.
15. He never turned away anyone who asked for help .
turn away: refuse to admit
16. He bought the car in 1988, then a modern type in China.
17. A 55-storey building went up in 1913.
go up : be built （没有被动语态）
到处都在盖新房.
New buildings are going up everywhere.
18. What does “New York never sleeps” mean?
All kinds of services are offered all night long.
Many service sectors （服务行业 ） work round the clock.
Lesson 50
Exercises for Lesson 50
1. 既然你已经康复了，你就可以和我们一起工作了。
Now that you are well again, you can work with us.
2. 既然你的工作已经完成了，你就可以走了。
Now that you have finished your work, you may go.
3. 食品供应源源而来。
Since 1978 , food supplies have been coming in large numbers.
4. 战争期间，我们士兵杀死了大量的敌人。
During the war, our soldiers killed the enemy in great / huge numbers.
5. From 1830 on / onwards in the USA, and from about 1870 in Canada, settlers began to move westwards and to take possession of the plains as their own.
从现在开始 from now on / onwards
从那时开始 from then on
从1990年开始 from 1990 on
6. At midnight they crossed the river and took possession of the village.
7. You can’t take possession of my house until all the papers have been signed.
8. Though busy, they still objected to putting off the meeting.
9. The settlers killed the bison, cut off the skins and left the bodies behind to rot.
10. They refused to give in （投降）and fought to the end.
11. Mother kept inviting Mrs Smith to stay for lunch, and finally she gave in.
12. Mary usually has to give in to her brother.
give in: 投降 屈服 同意 让步
13. The ground supported few plants, and the insects which lived on these plants died out.
die out 绝种
die away 消逝. 消失
die of 死于
die from
be dying for 渴望,很想…
be dying to do… 很想做…
A. These animals have already died out .
B. I am dying for a cup of tea.
C. The fire died out.
D. The noise died away.
E. She is dying to see you.
F. She died of old age.
14. These boys were called in turn to see the headmaster.
15. The arrival of the European settlers had a great effect on the life of Native Americans.
Homework
篇13：高三英语反思课教案、反思及评价(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
傅素清
短文改错（proof-reading）是全国统一高考（NM ET）第二卷中的一种试题，本题的宗旨是测试考生发现、判断、纠正文章中错误的能力，从某种意义上说，它是单句改错、单项填空、阅读理解和书面表达的综合，是全面考查学生的英语基础知识和灵活运用语言能力的测题。
一、短文改错中常见的错误形式
1、缺词：漏掉的词往往是冠词、介词、连词等虚词，这又与前后词的搭配有关，见到名词，应考虑是否缺了冠词；见到动词，可注意后面是否少了应与之搭配的介词或其它词；见到某些搭配，如in front of，as soon as，应考虑是否完整。不是固定搭配的，要注意英语行文习惯或逻辑上的搭配。（请看下表）
命题角度 考点 解题思路
名词 冠词 名词前是否缺冠词
不及物动词 介词 不及物动词是否缺介词
不定式 小品词to 不定式是否缺少了不该省的“to “
被动语态 助动词 被动语态中是否缺少了助动词be
母语迁移 词类用法 将形容词、副词或介词视作
动词使句子缺少谓语动词
固定搭配 惯用法 惯用法是否漏了不可缺少的词
2、多词：多余的词，往往是结构词。如冠词、介词、代词等等，一种是根据涉及到的名词、动词的特点、搭配和含义判断是否多了冠词、介词、副词。另一种是根据全句的结构和意义，判断是否多了连词或其它词。
命题角度 考点 解题思路
名词 冠词 抽象名词、物质名词泛指时是否多了冠词
动词 介词 及物动词后受母语影响是否多了介词
不定式 小品词to 不定式前是否多了该省的“to ”
时间状语 介词 时间状语是否多了介词
形容词、副词 比较结构 形容词、副词比较结构中是否多了相似词
固定搭配 惯用法 固定搭配是“画蛇添足”
3、错词：错词的类型复杂，不胜枚举，但常见的还是搭配错误与语法错误，特别是学生平时写作时常出的错误最易为命题者所关注，对于平时常常出错的地方要精心改正，做题时要小心仔细。
命题角度 考点 解题思路
名词 冠词 判断名词前的冠词是否误用
名词 名词的数 句中名词应该用单数还是负数
动词 动词时态、
语态以及主谓一致 根据上下文判断动词时态、
语态是否有误、主谓搭配是否正确
非谓语动词 分词、动名词、
不定式 根据上下文判断非谓语
动词是否误用
代词 人称代词的格、指代及关系代词与从句关系 1.人称代词的格是否误用
2.代词前后指代是否一致
3.定语从句中关系代词是否有误
形容词、副词 词法 判断句中形容词和副词是否混用
介词 惯用法 惯用法中介词是否误用
连词 句法 判断句中并列连词、从属连词是否误用
二、解题技巧
1、解题思路
要有整体阅读的概念，切不可拿过题一行一行地做下去。要先通读一遍，迅速弄懂短文大意，然后开始做题，做题时要注意每次必须看完一个完整的句子，有时还要再看看下面的句子，或返回去联系上一个句子，这样才能为我们的判断提供完整而又可靠的依据。
2、解题步骤
（1）浏览全文，了解全文大意，留心短文中关键的词语，为下一步判断和改错奠定基础。
（2）对照上下文分析句意，弄清上下文之间的内在联系及其逻辑关系，逐行逐句检查句子的结构是否完整，语气是否连贯，是否有与短文的中心意思不相符的现象。
（3）根据词法、句法知识，检查和判断句子所在。这是最关键的一步，可逐句检查主谓是否一致，代词、关联词的使用是否正确，动词形式是否恰当，词语之间的搭配是否正确，表达是否符合惯用法，大小写是否正确。
（4）根据不同错误分别进行解题。即分别进行改词、加词、减词等。
（5）复读全文，验证答案，将初步改错后的短文再次细读，检查并验证所做的答案是否能使全文语气贯通流畅，行文逻辑发展是否合乎情理，全篇结构是否严密完整等，遇到不通之处，须进一步分析、推敲，以使答案更有把握。
总之，只要平时学习打好基础，掌握命题规律，解题讲究思路、步骤与技巧，从具体语言环境、从上下行文逻辑、习惯用法、从分析句子等角度，以“行”为单位、以“句”为意群着手，经过一段时间的练习，短文改错题的解题能力就会明显改善。
运用一致关系，巧解短文改错题
陈婕
短文改错题是各地期末考试和高考的必考题型之一，其材料可以说是全卷最简单的，但同学普遍感到它是一个难度较大的题目，得分普遍较低，师生们都苦于找不到一种行之有效的解决方法。笔者认真分析了近几年来的高考试题，发现命题人对错误的设置普遍采用的是“前后不一致”的手段来进行的，根据这一命题特点，笔者采用“前后一致”的原则来进行改错，结果发现基本上70％以上的题均符合这一原则，答题效果极佳。现将这一技巧结合历届高考短文改错题剖析如下，愿此文对同学们有所启迪。（说明：“考例”由于篇幅所限，只列出某一句，因此文中的“前文”指该句之前的文章。）
一、人称前后不一致
【考例1】And they must not break the rules too often if we want to win the game．（NM ET）
【分析】从前文和从句中的we均可知道参加比赛的应是“我们”，而此题中主句与从句的人称不一致，显然应将they改为 we。
【考例2】The Smiths did his best to make me feel at home．（NM ET）
【分析】此题中主语为the Smiths，是复数，而宾语中的his却用了单数，很明显人称不一致，故将his改为their。
二、时态前后不一致
【考例3】．．．that I get a good education． They did not want me to do any work at family；they want me to．．．（NM ET）
【分析】全文均为一般现在时态或将来时态，显然did与前后时态不一致，故改为do。
【考例4】I am happy with any programme but the others spent a lot of time arguing．．
【分析】从前文和后句的spent可知此并列句应为过去时态，故将am改为was。
【考例5】I use to play ping-pong a lot in my spare time，but now I am interested in football．（NM ET）
【分析】从后句中的but now这一转折和上文可知前一个分句应为过去时态，故将 use改为used。
【考例6】We have a good time talking and laughing together．（NM ET1996）
【分析】整个文章均是描述过去的事情，均用的是过去时态，故将have改为had。
三、并列的成分前后形式不一致
【考例7】I remembered her words and calm down．I did a good job and won the first prize．（NM ET）
【分析】此句中的calm与remember是由and连接的并列谓语，故将calm改为 calmed。
【考例8】Playing football not only makes us grow up tall and strong but also give us a sense of fair play and team spirit．（NM ET1998）
【分析】此句中not only．．．but also．．．连接的是并列谓语，前面makes用的是第三人称单数形式，故give改为gives。由于两者相距较远，增大了试题的难度。
【考例9】It was very kind of them to meet me at the railway station and drove me to their home．（NM ET1996）
【分析】此句中的tomeet．．．作句子真正的主语，and连接的drove一词也同样为句子的主语，即并列主语，故将drove改为drive。
【考例10】Anyone may borrow books，and it cost nothing to borrow them．（NMET1994）
【分析】此句中and连接并列句，前一分句为一般现在时态，后一分句也应一样，故将 cost改为costs。
四、语态不一致
【考例11】Books may be keep for four weeks．（NMET1994）
【分析】此句应为被动语态，故将keep改为kept。
【考例12】．．．and let you know when the book you want has returned and is ready for you to pick up．（NM ET1994）
【分析】此句中book与return是被动关系，故在has和return之间加上been。
五、单复数前后不一致
【考例13】1．．．．so that I'll get good marks in all my subject．（NMET2001）
2．She said that she and my schoolmate all wished me success．．．（NMET2000）
【分析】此二句均有all一词，应指三个或三个以上的人或物。1句中marks和all都表明 subject应为复数subjects；2句中she and my schoolmate才两人，故将schoolmate改为 schoolmates，也因为校友肯定不止一人。
【考例14】Now my picture and the prize is hanging in the library．（NMET2000）
【分析】前面主语是复数，谓语理当用复数，故将is改为are。
【考例15】We practise three times every week and often watch football match on TV together．（NM ET1998）
【分析】句中有often一词，显然看比赛不止一场，故将match改为matches，而且可数名词不能单独用。
【考例16】We study quite a few subject， such as maths，Chinese，English and physics．（NM ET1997）
【分析】从句中例子来看科目不止一科，故将 subject改为subjects，而且a few后也必须接复数名词。
六、逻辑概念前后不一致
【考例17】It looks as if my parents treat me as a visitor and a guest．（NM ET2001）
【分析】根据文章意思，这里的visitor与 guest不是并列概念，而应是选择关系才对。故 and改为or。
【考例18】She was smiling but nodding atme．（NM ET2000）
【分析】从题意可知smiling和nodding在逻辑上应是并列关系，而非转折关系，故将 but改为and。
【考例19】Now I can't watch much television but a few years ago．．．（NM ET）
【分析】从下文可知由于一家人为看哪一节目意见不统一，进而发生争吵，最后干脆把电视机卖了，就没有电视看了，故将 much去掉才符合逻辑。本文采用了倒叙的手法，因而难度加大。
【考例20】Now someone at home reads instead．（NM ET1999）
【分析】此题与考例19是同一篇文章，考例19是文章的第一句，此句正好是文章的最后一句，显然现在已经没有了电视机，全家人都只好看书了，故将someone改为everyone或everybody才符合逻辑。
七、前后结构不一致
【考例21】I felt so nervous as I shook like a leaf．（NM ET2000）
【分析】此句一看就知是so．．．that．．．结构，故将as改为that。
【考例22】I was often a little tired after a day's work and watch TV demands very little effort．（NM ET1999）
【分析】此句是并列句结构，watch应为后一分句的主语，故将watch改为watching，因为名词才能作主语。
八、习惯结构不一致
【考例23】They do not want me to work at family．（NMET2001）
【分析】“在家”只用at home，故family改为home。
【考例24】We may be one family and live under a same roof．（NMET2001）
【分析】same一词通常与冠词the连用，故a改为the。
【考例25】．．．but the others spent a lot time arguing．．．（NMET1999）
【分析】a lot后不能接名词，只有a lot of才行，故将of加在lot和time之间。
短文改错专练
It was raining hardly at 9o'clock on Friday morning．There 1____
was not many traffic and weren't many people on Linden 2____ ．
Street．Suddenly I heard a car．I turned back and saw a red 3____
Toyota's car．The driver was driving much too fast．The 4____ ．
traffic lights were red，and he didn't stop．A little boy was 5____ ．
just riding cross the street and he was knocked down．The 6 __ __
driver jumped out of the car．He was short and fat young 7 ____
man with brown hairs．He took a look at the boy，then got 8____ ．
onto his car and drove away quickly．I saw the number of 9____ ．
his car-532064．I rushed to the boy．He was laying on the ground 10 ____ ．
with a lot of blood and his bicycle was broken．
答案及简析（A）：
1．hardly应改为hard。hard既可作形容词又可作副词。在这里，hard作副词讲，表示雨下得很大。而hardly意为“几乎不”，不符合题意。
2．traffic为不可数名词，故不能用m any修饰，而用m uch。
3．正确。
4．Toyota's改为Toyota。因为名词作定语时，不必再用所有格形式，直接用名词修饰即可。
5．and改为but。依上下文可以看出：文章此处为转折关系，而非并列。
6．cross改为across。作“穿过”讲时，cross为动词，而across为介词。本句中已有动词，故在此使用介词比较合适。
7．在short前面加a，因为下文中m an为可数名词单数。
8．hairs改为hair。hair为物质名词，故没有复数形式。
9．onto改为into。“get into a car”为固定用法，表“上车”之意。
10．laying改为lying。lay意为“放置”，而lie则意为“躺”。据上下文可知：这里应取“躺”之意，故用lying。
高三英语反思课教案
课题：如何做好短文改错题-沈永铭
一、教学目标：
1、通过从感性学习了解高考英语短文改错题的命题特征
2、从常见考点、词法和句法让学生学会短文改错的解题思路和基本解题方法
3、从根本上提高和促进书面表达的能力
二、教具：多媒体电脑、录音机
二、教学过程
第一步：投影介绍和20春季高考英语短文改错试题，目的是为了让学舌感只管感知短文改错题的基本特征。
第二步：教师总结
短文改错题一般给出一篇约100个单词的短文，其中10行每行右边标有题号，要求同学们判断该行是否有错，如有错则将其改正。错误的类型主要包括语法、句法、固定搭配、行文逻辑等方面。该题主要考查同学们在语篇中综合运用英语知识的准确性，也是考察同学们的书面和口头表达的流畅性。短文改错是很多同学普遍感到比较害怕的一种综合性题型。我认为这种害怕心理的产生与有些同学们还没有掌握该题型的特征和解题技巧、综合分析问题的能力不强有关。另外，也与同学们的英语基础知识和对英语国家的文化的掌握好坏密不可分。下面，我侧重谈一下如何把握短文改错的特征和解题对策。该题的特征如下：
1、词数在100-120左右；
2、以书信、日记、记叙文为主；
3、自1995年高考以来都以第一人称为主体人称；
4、以考查学生书面表达中的常见错误为主；
5、语言背景中外皆有，以国外为主；
6、出题涉及面广，但是动词、名词的 考查较多，知识覆盖面广。
7、大小写、标点符号、语序、单词拼写一般不作要求。
8、错处每行只有一处，且不重复。
9、缺词常考虚词，如介词、冠词、不定式符号to、情态动词、助动词、连系动词等。
命题角度 考点 解题思路
名词 冠词 名词前是否缺冠词
不及物动词 介词 不及物动词是否缺介词
不定式 小品词to 不定式是否缺少了不该省的“to “
被动语态 助动词 被动语态中是否缺少了助动词be
母语迁移 词类用法 将形容词、副词或介词视作
动词使句子缺少谓语动词
固定搭配 惯用法 惯用法是否漏了不可缺少的词
10、多词常考重叠现象：
命题角度 考点 解题思路
名词 冠词 抽象名词、物质名词泛指时是否多了冠词
动词 介词 及物动词后受母语影响是否多了介词
不定式 小品词to 不定式前是否多了该省的“to ”
时间状语 介词 时间状语是否多了介词
形容词、副词 比较结构 形容词、副词比较结构中是否多了相似词
固定搭配 惯用法 固定搭配是“画蛇添足”
还有以下常见的重叠现象：
1）从属连词与并列连词的连用(although…but/because…so…);
2) 介词与副词的连用(on the way to home/sat at there);
3） 词义的重叠(return…back/enter into/repeat…again);
4） 从句中的成分重叠;
5） 不及物动词前多余的be(what was happened),
6） 否定的重叠(no one/neither/little/few…not及惯用法。
第三步、改错的基本对策：
1、常见考点
命题角度 考点 解题思路
名词 冠词 判断名词前的冠词是否误用
名词 名词的数 句中名词应该用单数还是复数
动词 动词时态语态以及主谓一致 根据上下文判断动词时态、语态是否有误、主谓搭配是否正确
非谓语动词 分词、动名词、
不定式 根据上下文判断非谓语动词是否误用
代词 人称代词的格、指代及关系代词与从句关系 1.人称代词的格是否误用
2.代词前后指代是否一致
3.定语从句中关系代词是否有误
形容词、副词 词法 判断句中形容词和副词是否混用
介词 惯用法 惯用法中介词是否误用
连词 句法 判断句中并列连词、从属连词是否误用
2、以词的角度分析
1） 动词主要查时态、一般现在时的第三人称单数、语态、非谓语动词、主句与从句的时态是否一致。
2） 代词主要查指代是否一致、it的用法、some与any及no的用法、特别是定语从句的关系代词和关系副词which, that，when，where的比较。
3） 介词查搭配及容易误用的介词，如：across与through, between与among , in与on与at等介词的比较很容易混淆。
4） 形容词和副词主要查比较容易混淆的常见形容词和副词为主。例如：-ly为后缀的形容词：friendly, lonely, lovely; 形容词与副词同型：fast/early/late/hard;不同含义的副词high/highly, deep/deeply等。形容词、副词比较等级的可比一致性原则最重要，它包括：（1）同类相比的原则；（2）自己不能与自己想比较的原则；（3）比较级不能修饰比较级；最高级不能修饰最高级的原则；即more或者 less不能修饰-er结尾的比较级；most或者least不能修饰-est结尾的最高级。
5） 名词主要查可数名词的单、复数，查不可数名词的性质，查修饰名词的冠词的特指和泛指的比较，查主谓是否保持人趁和数的一致。
6） 连词主要查上下文之间的逻辑关系，包括并列连词、从属连词、连接代词、连接副词、关系代词、关系副词的比较。
3、从句子的角度去分析：
1) 查主语与谓语是否保持人称和数的一致；
2) 查时态是否一致；
3) 查指代是否一致；
4) 查上下文修饰语是否一致；
5) 查平行结构是否一致。
6) 查写作中容易忽视的介词及小品词。
第四步、实例分析--短文改错解析
Dear Mr。Yang,
It was with greater pleasure that I write to congratulate 1.___________
you with the 30th anniversary(纪念)of your English teaching. 2.___________
In early 1960s,you came back home from the United States. 3.___________
And then you have devoted you to the English teaching of the 4.___________
Chinese middle schools. In the past of 30 years, you have 5.___________
made 5 great achievements(成绩)in the English teaching research 6.__________
and the improvement of English teachers' methods. Meanwhile 7.__________
you have written many advancing theses(论文). You love your 8.__________
students and you gained their respect, too. Now you and your 9.__________
theses well known both inside and outside our school. 10.__________
Hearty congratulation and all the best wishes to you.
Yours ,
Li Hua
[篇章解析]本文是一篇书信体的应用文，解题时要顺着文体的特点展开。书信一般以第一人称和第二人称为主，常用一般时态表述；分写信目的、书信主体以及要求、问候三大部分。书信写作时特别需要注意语言礼貌。
1、was-is。本题考察时态一致性原则。首句讲的是写信人现在的心态，不能用过去时态。
2、with-on。在英文中要表示“因。。。。。。而向对方表示祝贺” 常用“congratulate sb. on sth.”的句式，属于固定搭配。
3、In的后面加定冠词the。“在二十世纪六十年代初期”的固定表达是“in the early 1960s”。
4、And的后面加介词since。本题强调时间状语与谓语动词的时态一致性。
5、去掉of。“in the past thirty years”是“在最近三十中”的固定表达。
6、正确。
7、teachers'--teaching。“英语的教学方法”的词组是“English teaching methods”。
8、advancing-advanced。在英文中“高级的”的只有“advanced”一词，它是由过去分词转换而成形容词作定语或表语。
9、you的后面加助动词have。本句时态现在为基点，且强调过去动作对现在的影响。宜用现在完成时。
10、theses之后加连系动词are。本句缺少了连系动词之后句子结构不完整。
第五步、练习巩固
A day，we were driving to the supermarket．On the way， 1 ____ ．
my husband and I saw that my 15-year-old son's bike was 2____ ．
parked outside the bookstore．It wasn't tied anything．We 3____ ．
were very angry because during the past year，two of his
bikes had stolen．In the name of tough love，we threw the 4 ____ ．
bike into the truck and continued to head out for the super- 5 ____ ．
market．Several hours late，we returned home，our 17-year-old 6____ ．
daughter met us at the door by a strange look as if she had 7 ____ ．
seen a cat eating a bird．“Mum and dad，the police were here 8____ ．
when you were away，”She said．Someone called at the police 9 ____
station and tell them your car's licence-plate for stealing a bike 10 ___ _．
at the parking place at the bookstore．
第六步、总结
改错的关键词是动词、连词、形容词和副词、关系代词和关系副词。另外，要注意从篇章的整体出发，做到“行句结合”；要注意语言学习中相互迁移现象（英有中无、中有英无）。总之，扎实的语法、基础知识能力+较强的综合分析能力=短文改错高分的秘诀。
高三高考复习反思课评课稿
高三英语备课组
沈：今天我们讨论这节反思课。这是一节高三英语复习课，这种课型本身就是一种比较难上的课。一般来说，应该全部用英语讲解，但基于我们这样的学生的语言基础而言，用中英文结合的方法去教的效果会更好一些。
傅：我认为这个课比较使用，有三大特点：
1、我认为这节课进行条块整理，先从高考短文改错的基本特征引入，再从词法和句法父母讲解高考短文改错的解题技，这样比较有利于帮助学生形成知识条块，提高英语解题技巧和解题能力；提高学生在实际应试的能力，促进学生思维能力的发展。
2、在教学过程中，执教教师教学基本功扎实，讲解的清晰，理论联系实际，问题是容量大了之后给学生的思维的时间不足，讲解的容量稍大了些，练习的容量少了一些。
3、在这堂课中，执教教师注意发挥学生的主观能动性，让单调的题型在交际和运用中进行，整堂课的教学效果比较好，知识点的落实效果良好，学生的回答流畅，交流没有受阻。
陈：、在这堂课中，执教教师充分运用了现代信息技术，信息量、易于操作的特点，使题型解题方法知道课的教学效益得到提高。
集体观点：课堂改进意见：
1、一堂课的容量不宜过大，否则会影响教学节奏、欲速而不达。
2、速度要适当控制，有利于落实基础，发展能力。
3、课堂交际还需更充分一些，让学生多讲一些，有利于培养学生的语用能力，让他们多发挥好主体作用。
4、练习宜更精练一些。
5、要增加一些学生的合作学习的因素。
6、建议先练后讲，可能效果更好。
总之，教无定法，教学有法。我们需要在教学实践中不断摸索和探索教学规律，使课堂教学达到最优化。
5月
高三英语复习反思课教学总结
我们高三英备课组在进行高三英语反思课的教学实践中，我们始终认真贯彻学校教科室的要求进行了教学的探索和实践。
首先，我们认为什么事情都是“有序而立”，计划可以体现我们的教学设想和教学目标，是教学研究活动中至关重要的一个环节。我们通过集体讨论指定了详尽的备课组反思教学活动计划，研究的矿架，在第二周就确立了高三英语反思课的课题、分工和个人的具体。本备课组由备课组长沈永铭老师为主进行开课活动，课题为“如何做好短文改错”这个很实用的课题。
接着，我们三人分头备课，沈永铭老师、傅素清和陈婕老师各写了一份教案；最后根据集体讨论的意见，最后定稿，完成了反思教学的集体教案。
在高三英语反思公开课，即高考复习公开课中，我们集体听课，集体评课，我们还吸收了其它备课组的老师和同人的意见，集思广益，修改晚会曾了我们的评课稿。和这一份反思活动的总结。
我们认为，反思既是行动的研究一个过程的结束，同时又是一个新的过程的开始。正是在这种从反思到问题，到计划制定，到采取教学行动，到观察，再到反思的螺旋式上升中，使我们的英语专业化曾度得到一定程度的提升，高三英语教学质量得到明显的提高，会考和高考成绩比去年有了明显的提高！
反思使再行动和观察之后作出的，它既使行动研究的第一循环的结束，也意味着新的行动研究循环的开始。反思的目的就在于寻求和促进教师行动或实践的合理性。
篇14：英语学科>>高三年级>>Angkor Wat (新课标版高三英语教案教学设计)
抛砖引玉】
在本单元同学们将要学习有关古迹保护的知识，了解闻名于世的柬埔寨古高棉王朝庞大的宫殿遗址吴哥寺（又名吴哥窟）的历史和现状，树立爱护古迹的战略思想。也许你曾听到过它的美丽传说，见到过它旖旎风光的拍照，看到过它富有神秘色彩的特写镜头。真是“风景这边独好”。春天，万木茂盛，百花盛开；夏天，泉清林翠，风景幽奇；秋天，硕果累累，层林尽染；冬天，银装素裹，悬冰倒挂。课文中对吴哥寺的高度评价是：“As the sun sinks lower , shadows spread across the courtyard . After sunset , the sky turns pink . The grey stone towers take on a golden colour before turning pink . Nowhere else in the world can there be such a quiet , beautiful place .” ( 随着夕阳西下，院内阴影纵横。日落后，天空一片红霞。灰色的石塔抹上一层金黄色，然后变成粉红色。世界上再没有这样优美、恬静的地方了。) 今天，吴哥寺这座世界文物古迹，正以它独特的魅力吸引着世界各地越来越多的游客。
虽然我们人人都走出国门去领略吴哥寺的风光不现实，但是在本单元的阅读课中，作者用一种趣味盎然的笔调重现吴哥寺的文明和灿烂，让我们从一滴水而感知辽阔的大海，从一只贝壳而聆听渺远的风声。下面就让我们在课文中提到的神秘的古迹中作一次精神旅行吧！
【指点迷津】
A. 大纲规定的单元日常核心交际用语指南
Obligation (职责)
● Idiomatic Sentences 功能套语 30 句
1. We should finish the task ahead of time . 我们应该提前完成这项艰巨的任务。
2. I think we should paint the windows green . 我认为应该把窗户漆成绿色。
3. Is it necessary to give you a ring immediately ? 有必要立即给你回电话吗？
4. We must stop people ( from ) walking on this floor until it‘s firm . 在地板牢固以前，我们不能让人们在地板上走动。
4. I ought to do some studying . 我应该学的东西。
5. You must stay home looking after your mother . 你必须呆在家里照顾你生病的母亲。
6. - Must I be present at the meeting at 7 o’clock ? 我必须 7 点到会吗 ？
- No , you needn‘t . You may come at around eight . 不，不必要。你可以 8 点左右来。
7. I have to type this report tonight . 今晚我必须打出这份报告。
8. - Do I have to return the dictionary before Friday ? 周五前我必须归还词典吗 ？
- No , you don’t have to . 不，没必要。
9. In my opinion , you should do your homework more carefully in future . 依我之见，你以后要多注意你的作业。
10. You ought to write to your parents very often . 你应该经常给父母写信。
11. Is it necessary to show your passport at the entrance ? 在入口处得出示护照吗 ？
12. It‘s necessary that you should come to the office tomorrow morning . 明天上午你得到办公室去一下。
13. We must keep the balance of nature . 我们应该保持生态平衡。
14. Students should keep the classroom tidy and clean . 学生应该保持教室整洁。
15. It is necessary to fill in the form at the door . 进门时必须填表。
16. Am I expected to repeat the explanation ? 要不要我把解释再重复一遍？
17. Am I supposed to pay a visit to our sick neighbour ? 我是不是探望一下有病的邻居？
18. Are we required to make a plan tonight ? 是不是今晚我们必须制定一个计划？
19. Is there any need for us to get his permission ? 我们是不是需要得到他的许可？
20. I am afraid you will have to walk home on foot . 恐怕你不得不步行回家了。
21. I am afraid you can’t avoid do some washing by yourself . 恐怕你逃避不掉自己洗衣服了。
22. I think it necessary for you to obey the rules . 我看你有必要服从规章制度。
23. It is for you to decide whether to go or to stay . 是去是留由你决定。
24. There‘s no reason why you should pull down that fence . 没有理由一定要你拆掉那个篱笆。
25. It is up to you decide . 由你决定。
26. Please leave it alone . 请别理它 。
27. You had better not pick the flowers . 你最好别摘这些花。
28. I feel it is my duty to give you a hand . 我感到帮助你是我的职责。
29. No , I mustn’t be late for class once more . 不， 我决不能再迟到。
30. No , I shouldn‘t tell him a lie . I had better not object to his suggestion . 不，我不应该对他说谎。我最好不反对他的建议。
从以上 30 句可以看出，在提示对方的职责中常用情态动词 must , should , need , have to , had better , ought to , don’t have to 以及 be supposed to do , be necessary to do 等。
● Model Dialogues 交际示范
A
Monitor：Who is on duty today ?
Yu Fang：I am .
Monitor：Class will begin in a minute . You should clean the blackboard .
Yu Fang：Sorry , I nearly forgot it . I‘ll do it at once .
Monitor：You have to remember this next time .
Yu Fang：Yes , I will .
B
Receptionist：Can I help you ?
Guest：Are there any free beds ?
Receptionist：Sure . What kind of room do you like ?
Guest：A single room with a bath .
Receptionist：OK. But you have to fill in this form first .
Guest：Is it necessary ?
Receptionist：Yes , we should also see your ID (身份证) card .
C
Doctor：Well , Mrs Smith , I’ve completed my examination and I‘m happy to say it’s nothing serious .
Mrs Smith：Don‘t you think I should take an X - ray ?
Doctor：I don’t think an X-ray is necessary for this illness .
Mrs Smith：Will I need a blood transfusion ?
Doctor：No , Mrs Smith , you won‘t need it .
Mrs Smith：Shouldn’t I stay in bed for the rest of the week ?
Doctor：No , you should get outdoors more and get plenty of exercise .
Mrs Smith：Can I be cured ?
Doctor：You should listen to my advice and I‘m certain you’ll be fine .
Mr Smith：What should I do ?
Guest：You should put this medicine on your arms every four hours and by tomorrow it will be all gone . There‘s nothing to worry about .
● 高考试题缩影
1. - Shall I tell John about it ?
- No , you . I’ve told him already . ( NMET 94)
A. needn‘t B. wouldn’t C. mustn‘t D. shouldn’t
2. - We could have walked to the station ; it was so near .
- Yes . A taxi at all necessary . ( MET 92 )
A. wasn‘t B. hadn’t been C. wouldn‘t be D. won’t be
3. There was a lot of fun at yesterday‘s party . You come , but why didn’t you ? (99 上海)
A. must have B. should C. need have D. ought to have
答案：AAC
B. 单元重点新词透视
1. smooth 作形容词是“光滑的，平静的，平坦的”；作及物动词是“使光滑，消除困难、障碍”。
Our path in life will not always be smooth . 我们的生活道路不会总是一帆风顺的。
This is a smooth meeting . 这是一次顺利的会议。
The cloth feels smooth . 这布摸起来很光滑。
The sea is smooth . 海面风平浪静。
The gardener smoothed the soil in a flower bed . 园丁平整了花坛的泥土。
测试要点：
(1) smooth 的发音 [ smU:T ] ，比较极是 smoother ，最高级是 smoothest 。过去式是smoothed , 发音为[ smU:Td ] 。用在第三人称后的发音是 smooths [ smU:Tz ]。
(2) 该词的同义词是 calm ，反义词是 rough 。常用搭配是 smooth away “克服困难，消除障碍或者分歧”。如：Don‘t be afraid . We are able to smooth away these difficulties sooner or later . 不要担心，我们迟早会克服这些困难的。/ The guide smoothed away / over the quarrel between the two visitors . 向导平息了那两位游客间的争执。
2. spread ( spread , spread ) 延伸，展开，流传，传播，蔓延
In two years the city has quickly spread for ten miles to the north . 这两年里城市很快地向北延伸了 10 英里。
How terrible ! The forest fire spread quickly . 真可怕 ！火势很快地蔓延。
The story of these advanced workers spread quickly . 这些先进工人的事迹很快就传开了。
测试要点：
(1) 特别注意该词的过去式和过去分词形式。如：Word spread quickly about the accident .
(2) the spread of … “……的普及；……的传播；……的蔓延”。这里 spread 是名词。如：the spread of a disease 一种疾病的蔓延。the spread of education 教育的普及。
3. opposite 作形容词是“相反的，对面的，相对的”。作副词是“相反地，对面地”。作名词是“对面，相反，对立物”。注意该词的发音：[ ’Cp[zIt ]
It is strange that he should go in the opposite direction . 真奇怪，他朝相反的方向走了。
They sell things on the opposite side of the river . 他们在河的对面卖东西。
Right and left are opposites . 左和右是相对的。
Black and white are opposites . = Black is the opposite of white . 黑和白是对立物。
Hate is the opposite of love . 恨是爱的反义词。
测试要点：
(1) 辨析 opposite 与 contrary to
opposite 多指位置、方向、性质、结果的不同。表示处于讲话人对面时放于其后；表示一组相对事物中的一个时放在其前。如：the girl opposite对面的姑娘，live on the opposite side of the street 住街的对面，。contrary 表示与目的、行为、论据对立的含义，只用作表语。如：You deeds are contrary to the traffic rules . 你的行为是和交通规则背道而驰的。
(2) 该次还可以作介词。如：opposite the school 在学校的对面。/ The shop opposite the street belongs to me . 街对面的商店是我经营的。作介词时其后也可以加 to 。如：He smiles and sat down opposite to her . 他微笑着坐在她的对面。/ The direction opposite to north is south . 和北相反的方向是南。
C. 单元重点词组扫瞄
1. buy some more bricks 买更多的砖
some more + 可数名词或者不可数名词，意思是“更多的……；再……怎样”。如：
Will you have some more beancurd ? 你多吃点豆腐好吗 ？
This time I feel like borrowing some more magazines . 这次我想多借几本杂志。
2. make the surface smooth 让表面光滑
It is said that this cream will make your face smoother . 据说这种面霜会使脸部皮肤更光滑。
3. do some drawings 画些画
It is not right for a pupil to do some drawings on the wall . 小学生在墙上乱画不对的。
4. stop sb / sth (from) doing = prevent sb / sth (from )doing 阻止某人干……
注意：当 from 后是被动语态时，from 不要省。如：
No one can prevent / stop this plan from being carried out . 谁也不能阻止这个计划的落实。
We must stop these children (from) playing football in the street . 我们必须阻止孩子们在大街上踢足球。
5. put up a notice saying “Keep off”= put up a notice on which is written “Keep off”立一个上面写有“勿踩踏”的牌子
注意 keep off 在上下文中的不同意思有：避开，挡住，制止吃喝，不吃不喝……
Do be careful to keep off the dangerous dog . 务必躲开那条危险的狗。
After his illness the old man kept off noodles for a week .
The only way to get your weight down is to keep off fat . 减肥的唯一办法是不要吃肥肉。
Wet paint ! Keep off ! 油漆未干，请勿靠近！
6. do some studying 学点习
It is useful for you to do some studying in your spare time .
7. masses of 大量的，大批的（修饰可数或者不可数名词）
Can‘t you see I have masses of things to see to today ? 你没看到我今天有很多的事要处理吗？
I have masses of unanswered letters this week . 本周我有一大堆来信没有回。
The majority of us are worried about masses of homework on Sunday . 我们大部分都担心星期天的许多作业。
8. watch the news on television 看电视新闻
9. fix up an electric wire 安装电线
10. ring the building firm 给建筑公司打电话
11. as it is / was 事实上，既然如此，就目前这样子看，根据现在的情况看
As it is , we can hardly get to the station by 6 o’clock . 事实上，我们 6 点前是很难赶到车站的。
She agreed to buy the house as it is . 她同意照房子原样买下来。
I thought things would get better , but as it is they are getting worse and worse . 我原来以为情况会好转，但现在看来，情况是越来越恶化。
Don‘t do anything to make the situation worse ; it’s bad enough as it is . 不要再火上加油了，现在情况就够糟的了。
12. report on 对……进行报道
13. one‘s first visit to + 地点 “对……的第一次访问”。
He will never forget his first visit to China .
14. at war 处于战争状态，处于交战状态
At that time China was at war with Japan . 当时，中国正与日本交战。
注意这里介词 at 后没有冠词 the 。类似的表达还有：at desk 在工作，at table 在用餐，at work在上班，at sea 在海上，at + 名词
针对练习：
1) When he writes , he always keeps a dictionary （在手边）.
2) My family and I were ____ (吃饭) when somebody knocked at the door .
3) Don’t be nervous . Make yourself ____ (无拘无束) .
4) ____ (目前) I‘m very busy . Let’s discuss it sometime next week .
5) His manners are rough , but he is a kind man (在内心里) .
6) It‘s ten o’clock (晚上) .
7) He is （求学）in Paris , so I‘m afraid you can’t see him .
8) They had first met (在航海中) .
9) Wilma can play music (一见) .
10) (有时) I made mistakes when speaking English .
11) These nations were (在交战) but now they are (和好) .
12) You may come and go (随意地) .
13) Are your parents (在上班) ?
14) The baby weighed 8 pounds (在出生时) .
注意留心下列习语中的冠词有无，其意义不变：
at (the) worst 在最坏的情况下，at (the) least 至少，at (the) latest 最迟 ，at (the)most 最多
答案：1) at hand 2) at table 3) at home 4) At present 5) at heart 6) at night 7) at school 8) at sea 9) at sight 10) At times 11) at war , at peace 12) at will 13) at work 14) at birth
15. When he was in college , his college was at war . 当他上大学时，他的国家正处于战争状态。
16. fall to pieces 倒塌，解体，垮台，摔碎，身体垮下来
That ancient building was falling to pieces . 那座古建筑物正在倒塌。
After the death of Napoleon , his empire began to fall to pieces . 那破仑死后，他的帝国就开始瓦解了。
These glasses have fallen to pieces . 这些玻璃杯已经摔碎。
Your father will fall to pieces if he doesn‘t stop working so hard . 如果你父亲再这样拼命干下去，他的身体回垮的。（这里 fall to pieces = break down）
No wonder the car is falling to pieces . Have you seen how he drives it ? 难怪这辆车垮了。你看到他是怎样驾驶的 ？
The rainy season lasts for six months and water gets in among the stones . 雨季长达六个月，雨水渗入石缝中。
测试要点：注意对比由动词 fall 构成的短语：fall asleep 睡着。fall behind 落后。fall down 倒塌。fall flat on one’s face 直挺挺地面朝下跌倒。fall in 掉入。fall in love with sb 爱上某人。fall / get into the / a habit of 养成……的习惯。fall off 从……跌落。 fall on one‘s knees = go down on one’s knees 跪下。fall / get sick = fall / get ill 生病。
17. piles of = masses of = supplies of = quantities of = lots of 很多，大量，一堆一堆的。
The study was full of piles of old books . 那个书房里堆满了一堆堆的旧书。
Piles of rubbish can be seen in that works . 在那个工厂可以看到一堆又一堆的垃圾。
18. get in 进入，收割，渗入，抵达，插入，请来
Can we get in the house by the back door ? 我们可以经过后门进入房子吗？
What time does the train get in ? 火车什么时间进站 ？
The peasants are busy in getting in the crops . 农民们正忙于收割庄稼。
We must get somebody in to repair the television . 我们必须请人来修理电视机。
Little Jim is always getting in a word when others are talking . 小吉姆总是在别人谈话时插嘴。
测试要点：注意理解由 get 构成的短语间意义上的区别。get get a word in = get in a word 插嘴。get about/ around / round 各处走动。get abroad 消息、谣言等的传开。get along 过活，过日，进展。get away 逃脱。get back 回来，取回，恢复。get cold = catch a cold 感冒。get down 从……下来，写下。get down to 开始认真干…… 。 get home 到家。get in / into touch with 与……取得联系。get into 进入。get into a habit of 养成干……的习惯。get into trouble 引起麻烦。get off 从……下来。get on 上车、上马、上飞机等。get ready 准备好。get rid of 摆脱。get through 结束，完成。get together 聚会。get up 起床。
19. go down to 下到，延续到，减少到
The native women go down to the river to wash clothes . 当地妇女到河里去洗衣服。
During her illness her weight went down from 50 kilos to 40 kilos . 她生病时体重由 50 公斤减少到 40 公斤。
注意 go down into 在本课是“根深深扎入”的意思。如：The roots go down into the holes between the stones .
20. devote + time / energy / oneself + to + -ing 把时间（精力）用于…… 。
He devoted 10 years to doing the research . = He spent 10 years doing the research .
Captain Cook devoted several years to charting the coasts of east America .
Lei Feng devoted all his life to serving the people .
21. lay down 安放，铺设，放下武器等。
She laid the sleeping child down on her bed .
They refused to lay down their arms . 他们拒绝放下武器。
Many new railways have been laid down in the past few years . 过去的几年里铺设了许多铁路。
22. Lay these boards along , not across . 把这些木板直着放，不要横着放。
23. in a corner 在角落里
Piles of stones lie in a corner of the courtyard .
We found her crying in the corner of the classroom .
注意：in the corner 是侧重在 180 度以下的角。在讲到 180 度以上的角时介词可用 at / on / round / around + the corner 。
There is a bookstore on / at the corner . 在街道拐角处有个书店。
He is standing at a street corner .
24. watch over 看守，照看，监视，守卫
The work of cleaning the stones is watched over by three Indian chemists . 石头的清洗工作是由三名印度化学家监督的。
The mother bird is watching over her young . 雌鸟守护着她的幼雏。
The prisoners were watched over by policemen .
25. fill in 填满，填写
In order get a passport , you must fill in the official form . 要申请护照，你得先填写正式表格。
26. at midday = at noon 在中午
27. protect against / from 保护不受……的侵袭或者伤害
We wear dark glasses to protect our eyes against the sun .
You must protect those boys against danger .
An umbrella will protect you against the rain .
28. in battle 在战争中，在战斗中
Millions of people were killed in battle .
29. in search of 寻找
注意区别：in one‘s search for
30. carry on 继续下去，继续进行
Please carry on as usual while I am away . 我不在时，请照常干。
Conversation was carried on in English .
Now let’s carry on with the work .
31. after sunset 日落后。
32. take on 呈现出新的面貌
After the thorough cleaning , our school took on a new look . 大扫除之后，我校呈现出了新的面貌。
Since 1978 , China has taken on a new look .
Under the vivid pen of the writer , these dry facts of history have taken on flesh and blood . 在这位作家生花妙笔之下，这些枯燥乏味的历史事实被写得有血有肉的。
The new leaders are making every effort to improve business management , and the factory is beginning to take on a new look . 新领导努力改善经营管理，工厂开始呈现新的面貌。
After the students put up a Christmas tree in the centre , the classroom took on a holiday appearance . 同学们在教室中央放了一株圣诞树，教室里呈现出一派节日景象。
33. fall into ruins 坍塌成废墟
Many of the stone figures had been stolen and others were falling into pieces . 许多石像被盗窃，另外一些石像崩裂倒塌。
34. be astonished by 被……弄得大为吃惊
be astonished to do 干……很吃惊
be astonished that 对……大为吃惊
35. cover an area of = take up an area of = occupy an area of = have an area of 占地面积……
This school covers an area of 500 square miles .
China has an area of about 9,600,000 square kilometres .
36. over a period of + 时间“历经……时间”
37. up until / to 直到，到……为止
The French , after discovering the ruined temple , did a lot of repair work up until 1970. 在发现这座满目疮痍的寺庙后，法国人做了大量的修复工作，直到1970年为止。
They had been built over a period of six centuries up till 1431 . 它们是1431年以前经过六个世纪才建成的。
38. do a lot of repair work 做大量的维修
39. in a poor state 处于破烂不堪的状态。
注意该词组的不同搭配：in a solid state 以固体状态。in a bad state of health 身体状态不佳。in a good state 状态良好。
40. have experience in 在……有经验
He has a lot of experience in repairing TV sets . 他有大量的修理电视机的经验。
She has much experience in teaching English .
注意：experience 作经验是不可数名词，作经历是可数名词。
We had several terrible experiences on our trip . 我们在旅途中遇到了几件可怕的事。
41. hand tools out to workers 把工具分发给工人
42. carry out repairs to + 名词 “对……实施维修”
43. once in a while 偶尔，有时
I don‘t drink wine as a rule , but I don’t mind a glass once in a while . 我一般是不饮酒的，但是我也不反对偶尔喝一杯。
44. have a shower 洗淋浴
45. depend on / upon sb to do 依靠某人干……
46. have a midday break 中午休息一下
47. give a tip to sb = give sb a tip 给某人小费
You had better give tips to waiters .
48. go/ make / take + on a tour of + 地点 “对……进行参观；到……旅游”
We are going to make a tour of New Zealand next summer .
49. spread across 传遍
The disease spread quickly across the village .
50. obey the rules for sb 服从对……的规定
D. 单元语法学习目标
复习动词的时态：一般现在时、现在进行时、现在完成时、一般过去时。
● 一般现在时（The Present Indefinite Tense）的测试 5 要点：
1、表示不受时间限制的客观存在、科学真理、格言等。
Water boils at 100 ℃ .
Twice two is four .
The earth goes around the sun .
Pride goes before a fall . 骄者必败。
One today is worth two tomorrows . 一个今天胜过两个明天。
Practice makes perfect . 熟能生巧。
Japan lies to the east of China .
Shanghai stands on the Huangpu River .
England and France are separated by the English Channel .
2、一般现在时表示经常地或者习惯的动作，常与频度状语 usually , often , sometimes , every morning , always , regularly 以及 at present , these days , nowadays , at the moment 等时间状语连用。
Mum doesn‘t drive as well as Dad . She stops too suddenly and turns quickly .
Peter used to work in Geneva , but at present he works in London .
The Hunts usually live in Scotland , but at the moment they live in the south .
Being middle school students , you do homework every day .
3、在口语中，一般现在时往往可和一个表示未来时间的状语连用，表达一个按规定、计划、安排要发生的动作。这种动词是：go , come , fall , arrive , start , begin , meet , stay , take , place , happen 等。
When do you start , Mr Green ?
This train leaves at 10:00 .
Miss Black comes next week .
- When do they leave for the countryside ?
- They start next Saturday .
A：Is there any meeting today ?
B：Yes . It begins at 2:30 in the afternoon .
4、在时间和条件状语从句中可用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
Please let me know when he comes back .
I will go to see him if it is fine tomorrow .
If he doesn’t like it , nor / neither will I.
5、在某些以 here , there 开头的句子中用一般现在时表示正发生的动作。
Here comes the bus ! 汽车来了！
There goes the bell ! 铃响了！
● 现在进行时（The Present Continuous Tense）的 7 个测试要点
1、现在进行时表示说话时正发生的或者正进行的动作。常与时间状语 now , at the moment 等连用。
It is raining hard now . Don‘t hurry .
I am writing a letter . Will you please turn down the radio ?
Watch out (当心) ! It’s falling .
Look ! The clouds are gathering .
Look at this picture of a busy railway station . A train is standing at one of the platforms ready to leave . Some of thepassengers are looking out of the windows watching the late-comers who are hurrying along looking for empty seats .
We are busy at the moment . I‘m selling cigarettes . My father is selling some sweets .
2、表示现阶段正在进行而此刻不一定在进行的动作。可和时间状语 now , these days 等连用。
She is studying law while her brother is studying medicine .
Is my daughter working hard in the factory , Manager Wang ?
How are you getting along / on with your studies ?
I usually get up at eight , but I’m getting up at six every day this week .
3、表示按计划、安排将要发生的动作。
We are going to Rome next week .
Mr Black is leaving for Shanghai in a few days .
Are you doing anything special tonight ?
4、用在时间和条件状语从句中表达将来正进行的动作。
I‘ll telephone you this afternoon while I’m waiting .
I‘ll think about it while you are writing the report .
When you are talking with him , take care not to mention this .
If you are standing at the corner when I pass , I’ll give you a lift into town .
5、现在进行时和动词 hope , wonder 连用表示婉转的口气。
I am hoping you‘ll give me some advice .
I’m wondering if I may have a word with you .
We are wondering if you have any suggestion .
6、现在进行时与 always , continually , constantly 等副词连用表示反复或者习惯性的动作，含有说话人的某种感情色彩，如赞扬、遗憾、讨厌、不满等。
He is always asking such easy questions .
He is constantly leaving his books about .
7、少数动词，如jump , hit , kick , knock , drop 等瞬间动词用进行时比动作的重复或者即将发生。
He is knocking at the door .
The girls are jumping .
● 一般现在时和现在进行时的 6 个区别点
区别点一：一般现在时表示经常性的动作，而现在进行时表达现在或者现阶段正发生的动作。
He studies hard .
He is studying hard this term .
My watch works perfectly . (经常性)
My watch is working perfectly . (短暂性)
He lives in Beijing .
He is living in Beijing .
区别点二：用现在进行时往往带有感情色彩，而用一般现在时只是说明事实。
John does fine work at school . （说明事实）
John is doing fine at school . （表扬）
Now I live in a very pleasant flat . （事实）
Now I am living in a very pleasant flat . （满意）
现在进行时表达感情色彩时常和always , forever , constantly 等连用。
He is always thinking of how he could do more for the poor .
She is always changing her clothes .
区别点三：一般现在时表示现在发生的动作，现在进行时表示眼前看得见的动作。
Boats pass under the bridge .
The boat is passing under the bridge .
区别点四：一般现在时用来表示永久的情况或者完成的动作，现在进行时表示的暂时或临时性动作。
My parents lives in Canada .
I‘m staying with one of my classmates .
区别点五：表示知觉、感觉、看法、感情、愿望的动词常不用现在进行时而用一般现在时。如：see , hear , smell , notice , taste , know , think , like , want , wish , have , fit , belong to 。
The necklace belongs to Jenny .
I hear you want to do business abroad .
区别点六：表示问候性的亲切感多用现在进行时。
How are you feeling today , Xiao Ming ? I hope you will be well soon .
How are they getting along with their work ?
● 现在完成时（The Present Perfect Tense）的 6 个测试要点
1、不带时间状语的现在完成时表示说话之前动作已经完成，而后果和影响至今存在。
He has gone to Europe . You can’t see him .
Has he had his supper ?
He has gone to Beijing . 他去北京了。
He has been to Beijing .他去过北京。
2、带状语的现在完成时表示动作开始于过去并持续到现在，也许还要持续下去的动作或者状态。
She has been ill for two weeks .
I haven‘t seenhim for many months .
She has learnt a lot since she cameto No. 16 Middle School .
3、在用 already , yet , before , just , ever , lately , recently 这类副词或者频度副词 often , sometimes , rarely , never , once , twice , three times 做状语时常用现在完成时。
Have you ever listened to foreign music ?
This is the second game . They’ve already won a game .
He as well as I has seen the film before .
We went to have a haircut once a month .
4、特别注意由 since , for 引起的时间状语与现在完成时的连用。since 后必须是确定的时间点，而不能是一段时间。
I‘ve known him since we were children .
They haven’t visited us since 1998.
由 for 引起的时间状语中，介词 for 常被省去。
I‘ve studied English (for)a long time .
For months he hasn’t gone to the movies .
5、含下列状语的句子常与现在完成时连用：ever since , in the past two weeks , in the last few years , until now , till now , up to now , up to the present , so far , for the last few months , over the last few weeks . during the last few centuries 。
Up to now , everything has been successful .
In the last 50 years China has made great advances in socialist revolution and socialist construction .
6、注意现在完成时不能与非延续性动词连用。如：marry , die , leave , start , join , end 等。但可以借助这些动词的形容词或状态词与现在完成时连用。
He has been married to Joan for a year . = He married Joan a year ago .
She has been a Party member for two weeks . = She joined the Party two weeks ago .= It is two weeks since she became a Party member .
● 一般过去时（The Past Indefinite Tense）的 4 个测试要点
1、一般过去时表示过去某一时刻或者某一段时间发生的动作或者状态。
Last night we went to enjoy a good performance .
I usually sleep indoors , but I slept outdoors last summer .
- How long have you been here ?
- Only about five minutes . Jane and Simon walked here with me .
I can‘t find the dictionary . Someone put it on the top of the bookshelf .
2、表示过去的习惯动作。通常同时间或者频度状语连用。
He smoked a lot five years ago .
We went to school together when we were boys and so we saw each other every day .
The doctor came once a week and examined all who were ill .
3、used to do 和 would 常表达过去常干……。used to 含有强烈的今昔对比，可以和状态动词连用。而would 不能与状态词连用，句中常用时间状语的暗示。
Tom used to eat out every day , but now he can’t afford it .
When he was old , he would rise early and take a walk before breakfast .
We used to be good friends . (不能用 would)
There used to stand a tower at the foot of the hill . (不用 would)
4、在句型 “It is time that …；It is about time that … ；It is high time that … ”后的从句中用一般过去时。在 would rather , would sooner , had rather , had sooner 后的从句中用一般过去时。
It is high time that we went to school .
I had rather you came next week .
二、学海导航
【学法指要】
Unit 7 句型与难点释疑
Lesson 25
1. I don‘t think these will be enough . 我认为这些还不够。
〖释疑〗注意陈述句以第一人称主语 I / we + don’t think (expect , believe , guess , imagine , suppose) + that 从句时，反意疑问句与从句相一致 ， 用肯定式，因否定已前移。否则，主句是由其他人称作主语时，仍与主句相一致。例如：
I don‘t think these will be enough , won’t they ?
We don‘t believe that she has her breakfast , does she ?
对比：we don’t believe that she has had her breakfast , has she ?
He doesn‘t suppose you are a great success , does he ?
2. What can we do to make it look less ugly ? 我们能想个什么办法使它不那么难看呢 ？
〖释疑〗注意使用 make sb do , make oneself done , be made to do , make sth to do
They made us work all day and all night against the flood water . = We were made to work all … .
She raised her voice to make herself heard by all of the them .
He made a box to put his shoes in .
3. As long as that ? 要那么长的时间吗 ？= Will it take as long as that ?
〖释疑〗as long as 长达……之久。
It took as long as eight years to repair the old temple .
It took them as long as three years to find out the cause of the plane crash .
It took this tennis player as long as four hours to win the championship .
另外注意 as long as = so long as = if “只要”引起条件状语从句，句中用现在时代替将来时。
You can smoke as long as you are not afraid of breaking the rules .
Lesson 26
1. Piles of stones lie in a corner of the courtyard , waiting to be replaced . 院子的角落里放着一堆一堆的石头，准备作更换之用。
〖释疑〗句中的 waiting to be replaced 是现在分词短语作伴随状语。这时可以变为并列谓语动词的句子或者非限制性定语从句。如上面的分词短语可换为：
Piles of stones are in a corner of the courtyard , and are waiting to be replaced .
Piles of stones are in a corner of the courtyard , which were waiting to be replaced .
Many people stood along the river bank watching the boat race . = Many people stood along the river bank and watched the boat race .
2. As the sun sinks lower , shadows spread across the courtyard . 随着夕阳西下，院内的阴影扩展开来。
〖释疑〗as 作连词引导的时间状语从句含有“当……的时候；一边……一边”。 when常含有“突然……”。while 常含有“对比”。
As one grows older , one becomes more experienced .
We were walking along the street when we heard “Help ! Help !”.
He was doing some reading while I was doing some washing .
3. To make things worse , many of the men have gone off to cities in search of higher pay , leaving women from nearby villages to carry on with the work . 更糟糕的是，很多男子去城里谋求较高工资的工作，因此，只有让附近村庄里的妇女来从事这一修复工作。
〖释疑〗to make things worse “使情况更糟糕的是”。
leaving women … 是现在分词短语作结果状语。
注意 leave 的复合结构有：
1）leave + 名词 / 代词 + to do 让某人去干……。
Oh , you can leave me to deal with the matter .
2）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 形容词作宾补
His illness has left him very weak .
3）leave + 名词/代词 + 过去分词作宾补
How careless you are to leave your room unlocked .
4）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 现在分词做宾补
His words left us talking all the day .
5）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 介词短语作宾补
This left her without a ray of hope .
6）leave + 名词 / 代词 + 从句
Leave it where it is .
Leave everything as it is .
Leave the animals as they are .
4. Nowhere else in the world can there be such a quiet , beautiful place . 世界上再没有这样优美、恬静的的放了。
〖释疑〗此句是倒装句。正常语序是：There is nowhere else in the world as quiet and beautiful as this place . 如果 nowhere 不放在句首，句子就不倒装。
当含有否定意义的副词或者连词放在句首时句子用倒装。这类词有：hardly , never , not , neither , not only … but also , little , nowhere , not a single , scarcely , barely , at no time , not once , in no time 立即,in no way 决不，by no means 决不， 等。
Never in my life have I seen such a stone .
Not a single mistake did he make this time .
Nowhere has the world ever seen such a bird as here .
By no means should we do like that .
Not only was everything he had taken away from him , but also his German citizen .
Nowhere is there a place for him to settle down .
Nowhere can you enjoy such beautiful music .
Ltttle did he know what trouble he was going to have .
Not until quite recently did I hear from her .
Very little did they sleep last night .
对比：Her watch is nowhere to be found . = Nowhere is her watch to be found .
注意对比由 not only … but also 连接两个并列成分作主语时，句子不倒装。
Not only girls but also boys wear such red skirts as that .
Lesson 27
1. Thousands of stone blocks were moved and new roof sections were replaced where necessary . 移动了成千上万的石块，必要的地方还换上了新的屋顶。
〖释疑〗where necessary = where it is necessary to replace them .
本句是省略句。常见的省略有：
一、主语中的省略
1. 主句中的省略多见于句首，且多用于非正式文体。如：
(It is) Too bad you can’t go camping with us next week .
(Is there) Anything more you want to say ?
2. 回答时，主句有时全省去。如：
- When shall we start ? - (You may start) Whenever you like .
- Why is he angry with her ? - (He‘s angry with her) Because she lost his keys to the office .
二、从句中的省略。
1. 宾语从句。
以 which , when , where , how , why 等引出的宾语从句中谓语与主句相同时，可省略谓语乃至主语而只保留引导词。如：
Please hand me any one of these books ; I don’t care which (you hand me) .
He‘ll return to his hometown , but we don’t know when (he‘ll return ) .
She can’t attend this meeting , but we wonder why (she can‘t attend) .
2. 在 I’m afraid , I believe , I hope , I imagine , I should say , I suppose , I think 等之后的“not”与 “so”分别等于否定与肯定的宾语从句。如：
Will it snow tonight ? - I hope not . (= I hope that it won‘t snow tonight . )
Is he disappointed ? - I’m afraid so . (= I am afraid that he is disappointed . )
3. 定语从句可以省略作宾语的关系代词；在非正式文体往往省略关系副词 when 和where ; 关系代词 as 引导的定语从句中，主谓结构也往往被省略。如：
I‘ll never forget the days (which) we spent together in the village .
I’ll never forget the day (when) we first met .
He gave the same reason as (he had given) before .
4 . 状语从句。
(1) 在时间、让步、方式、条件状语从句中，如果从句主语是 it 或与主句主语一致时，则从句中的主语和 be 动词通常省略。如：
My sister started to learn dance when (she was) a child .
Although (he was) the youngest in his class , he won the first prize .
His suggestion , whether (it is) right or wrong , would be considered .
I‘ll attend this lecture , if (it is) possible .
(2) 由 than , as 引导的比较状语从句中，在不影响句子要表达的完整意义的条件下，从句中的成分可省略。如：I know you better than (I know) him .
【妙文赏析】
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从 1- 20 各题所给的四个选项中选出最佳答案。
James sat outside the office waiting for the interview . He felt so (1) that he didn’t know what to do with (2) . The person who had gone in (3) him had been in there for nearly an hour . And she looked so confident(自信的) when she went in . (4) James . He felt (5) that she had already got the (6) . The problem was that he wanted this job (7) . It meant (8) to him . He had (9) it such a lot before the day of the interview . He had imagined himself (10) briliantly at the interview and (11) the job immediately . But now here he was feeling (12) . He couldn‘t (13) all those things he had (14) to say . At that moment , he almost decided to get up and (15) . But no - he had to do this . He had spent so much time considering it that he couldn’t (16) like that . His hands were hot and sticky and his mouth felt dry . At last the door of the office opened . The woman who had gone in an hour earlier came out looking very (17) with herself . She smiled sympathetically(同情地) at James . At that moment James (18) her . The managing director then appeared at the office door . ‘Would you like to come in now , Mr Davis ? I‘m sorry to have kept you waiting . ’James suddenly (19) that he had gone home after all . He got up ,legs (20) and forehead sweating and wondered whether he looked as terrified as he felt .
1 . A . healthy B . nervous C . careless D . confident
2 . A . the managing director B . the woman C . himself D . the situation
3 . A . by B . with C . before D . after
4 . A . Not like B . So did C . Do as D . Do like
5 . A . doubtful B . sure C . angry D . astonishing
6 . A . reward B . first C . prize D . job
7 . A . hopelessly B . naturally C . easily D . so much
8 . A . everything B . happiness C . difficulty D . nothing
9 . A . dreamed of B . learned of C . thought about D . talked about
10 . A . explaining B . performing C . answering D . writing
11 . A . offered B . asked for C . being offered D . being asked for
12 . A . crazy B . excited C . probable D . terrible
13 . A . depend on B . afford C . believe in D . remember
14 . A . kept B . been taught C . planned D . been supplied
15 . A . leave B . go in C . prepare D . practise
16 . A . take back B . put off C . give up D . put down
17 . A . ugly B . pleased C . sad D . pretty
18 . A . noticed B . loved C . missed D . hated
19 . A . thought B . hoped C . wished D . regretted
20 . A . shaking B . bending C . walking D . stopping
〖赏析〗从上下文透射出文章中的两个形成鲜明对比的人物，一个是洋洋得意的女求职者，她傲慢的形象令人作呕。另一个是令人同情的 Mr Davis ，他很需要这份工作，但自己信心不足，位能表现出比胜的信心。1、选B。从下文那位女子在里面已有近一个小时可想 Mr David 在门外焦急等待的心情。2、选C。越是焦急，越是控制不住自己的形象。do with himself 在这里可理解为 “控制自己”。3、选C。从下文等待知已有人在他前面应试。4、选A。从该女子lookes so confident “显得如此自信”可以说她不像Mr Davis 那样。5、选B。feel sure that “感到一定能”为固定词组。6、选D。来这里是为了谋到一份工作。7、选D。从下文He had thought about it such a lot before the day of the interview 可以推出他十分需要这分工作。8、选A。既然对这次应聘左思右想，自然意义重大。9、选C。从下文的该说什么，该怎么表现出非凡的形象可推知应提前反复考虑。10、选B。要想应聘成功，必须给人以称职的印象，这就需要应试这表现出非凡的言谈举止和素养。故用perform有表现之意。11、选C。应试成功就被别人给一份工作，imagine 要求后跟动名词，故应被给一份工作，这里用了动名词的被动式。12、选D。从那位女子的情况导致他失去应试的决定。这自然是让人不寒而栗的。13、选D。在关键时候人一紧张会产生手忙脚乱，丢三忘四的情况。14、选C。原计划的所作所为成为泡影，plan to 计划干……。15、选A。从get up 可看出他准备放弃应试，一走了之。16、选C。可又一想，自己为此不知花了多少时间，这样轻而易举的放弃不是太可惜吗？成功与否，不试哪能知晓？17、选B。那女子自以为胜券在握，但下文让Mr Davis 进去说明鹿死谁手，难以定论。18、选D。看着那样一个女子是自己的对手，他当然是怀恨在心。19、选C。他的心情真是十分混乱，狠不得自己早已溜走。20、选A。紧张时人口干、腿软、额头冒汗，这是常识。
【思维体操】
人体名词的别致魅力
在英语里，表示人体各部分的名词，如眼、耳、口、鼻、心、手、脚等常用在习惯用语中，生动形象，栩栩如生，具有强烈的修辞效果。请同学们仔细阅读下文，体会人体名词的具体意义。
一、人体名词赋有抽象意义，具有转喻性。
It was surprising that there were so many hungry mouths .
令人不可思议的是，竟有如此多的难民。
Premier Zhu completed the first leg of a five－nation tour .
朱总理完成了访问五国旅途中的第一段行程。
Her niece has a sharp tongue . 她侄女说话尖刻。
Will you keep an eye on my suitcase ?
请照看一下我的手提箱好吗 ?
She has an ear for music. 她有欣赏音乐的能力。
Journalists usually have a nose for news .
记者常善于打听消息。
He has a head for figures . 他善于计算。
They live in the heart of the city . 他们住在市中心。
Little Tom has a tooth for candy. 小汤姆爱吃糖。
He is four feet six inches . 他身高四尺六寸。
二、人体名词具有拟人的修辞效果。
The wheat is heading up nicely . 小麦长势良好。
His name heads the list . 他是名单上的第一名。
The docks fingers out into the water. 码头伸向水面。
She always eyes him narrowly . 她总是端详着他的一举一动。
A soldier handed her out of a car . 一位战士扶她下了车。
Arm our minds with DengXiaoping’s Theory .
用邓小平的理论武装我们的头脑。
三、在一些谚语或警句中，人体名词具有对应修辞格的特点。
A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush .
双鸟在林不如一鸟在手。(多得不如现得。)
Two heads are better than one. 两人智慧胜一人。
Many hands make light work. 人多事易做。
Out of sight，out of mind. 离久则情疏。（眼不见心不烦。）
四、人体名词代替人，有提喻作用。如：
We‘re short of hands at present. 目前我们缺乏劳动力。
The plane was lost with 100 souls. 那架飞机失事，有100人丧生。
Grey hairs are respected in China. 在中国，老年人受到尊敬。
Do pay attention to those hungry mouths.
务必关注那些饥饿的人们。
Dear heart，look at your face! 宝贝，看看你自己的脸吧!
五、人体名词表委婉修辞
The old man closed his eyes. 那位老人已去逝了。
She is off her head for ages. 她已精神失常好久了。
The man in black is a light－fingered gentleman.
穿黑衣服的是个小偷。
She is still with one foot in the grave. 她已危在旦夕。
The news made us open our eyes. 那消息使我们瞠目吃惊。
He is on his last legs. 他已奄奄一息。
六、人体部位词可以作句子的状语
In those days they fought shoulder to shoulder bravely.
那时他们英勇无畏地并肩战斗。
Strangely，they were standing face to face.
奇怪的是，他们当时面对面站着。
Both of them lay there back to back. 他们俩背对背而卧。
七、人体部位词后加－ed可构成复合形容词，形象而逼真。
a warm－hearted man 热心肠的人
a fair－haired girl 一个长着金色头发的姑娘
a round－faced boy 一个圆脸男孩
a blue－eyed woman 一个蓝眼睛的妇女
a three－legged table 一张三条腿的饭桌
a one－eyed general 一个独眼将军
三、智能显示
【心中有数】
一、高中英语第三册 Units 1-6 词语辨析
Unit 1
1 . believe / believe in
believe 意为“相信，认为”，其后跟名词，也可跟从句或带不定式的复合宾语 ( 动词多为 be，它还可以用在否定的“简略答语”中，not 位于动词之后 ) 。例如：
I just could not believe my eyes . 我简直不能相信我的眼睛。
I believe that he was dead . 我认为他那时已经死了。
He believed the earth to be a globe . 他相信大地是一个球体。
- Will they be ready tomorrow ? 他们明天能准备好吗 ?
- I believe not . 我看不行。
believe in 意为“信奉，信仰”，后面常接表示真理或宗教一类的名词，也作“信任，信赖”解。例如：
My grandpa believes in Buddhism . 我爷爷信奉佛教。
We don’t believe in ghosts . 我们不信鬼神。
We must work , and above all we must believe in ourselves . 我们必须注意：believe in sb 与 believe sb 有不同的含义。试比较：
I believe him . ( = I believe what he says . )我相信他的话。
I believe in him . ( = I think he is a good comrade . )我信任他。
2 . disappointed / disappointing
两者都是形容词，与系动词 be 连用能构成复合谓语，be disappointed 意为“对……感到失望”，当宾语为“某人”时，其后跟介词 with；当宾语为“某事物”时，其后跟介词 with , at 或 about；当宾语为动词-ing 形式或 what 从句时，其后多用介词 about 或 at。例如：
I‘m disappointed with you . 我对你感到失望。
Are you very disappointed about / at losing the race ? 你比赛输了感到失望吗 ?
注意：disappointed 是表示感情的词，因此，主语多为表示人的名词。而 disappointing 意为“……令人感到失望”，主语多为表示某物或某种情况的词。例如：
The talk is disappointing . 这个报告令人失望。
It is very disappointing to heart that you are going to leave us soon . 听说你快要离开我们了，我们很失望。
disappointed 和 disappointing 也可以用作定语。如：a disappointed person 失望的人；disappointing news 令人失望的消息
3 . deep / deeply
两者都可以用作副词，这两个词不仅音形相似，而且都意为“深深地”。deep 多用于描写状态，常与介词 into 搭配。例如：
Radium , because of its powerful radioactive rays , can go deep into the human body . 镭具有很强的射线，能深入到人的肌体。
Father often works keep into the night . 父亲常常工作到深夜。
在某些短语中，常用副词 deep。如：drink deep 痛饮；be buried deep 深埋deeply 常和表示感情的动词、形容词或过去分词连用，相当于 very much。例如：
Marie was deeply shocked by Pierre’s death . 皮埃尔的逝世使玛丽极为震惊。
Since then the boy has been deeply interested in physics . 从那时起，这孩子对物理学发生了极浓厚的兴趣。
修饰表示具体的动作或状态的动词时，常用 deep，有时也可用 deeply。例如：
I know she would sleep deeply(或 deep)for about twelve hours . 我知道她会沉睡十个小时。
deep 还可以用作形容词和名词，deeply 则不能。例如：
This well is 30 metres deep . 这口井有30公尺深。
the deep of winter 隆冬
4 . cure / treat
cure 意为“治疗”，“治愈”，强调治好疾病的结果，使病人恢复健康，有时可指突然的、戏剧性的痊愈，它后面可以跟指疾病或指人的宾语，也可以在指人的宾语后面用 of 再加指疾病的宾语。例如：
Radium is still used today for curing cancer . 今天镭仍被用来治癌。
The doctor cured him of his stomach . 医生治好了他的胃痛病。
cure 还可解作“矫正”、“纠正”，借喻指消除社会某种不良现象或个人恶习等。例如：
The parents tried to cure the child of his bad habits . 父母亲尽力纠正这个孩子的不良习惯。
treat 意为“医治”，“治疗”，强调治疗的动作或医治的过程，不涉及治疗的结果。例如：
The doctors are trying their best to treat her with a new drug . 医生们试图用一种新药为她治病。
Which doctor is treating you for this trouble ? 哪位医生在给你治病 ? treat 还可解作“对待；看待”。例如：
The villagers treat the old people kindly . 村民们待老人很好。
Unit 2
1 . in charge of / in the charge of
两者在句中常用作表语和定语，in charge of 是“某人负责或管理什么”，含主动意思。例如：
Cook was to be in charge of this expedition as captain of the ship Endeavour . 库克将作为“奋进”号轮船的船长负责这次远航。
Who‘s in charge of the booking office ? 售票处是哪一位负责 ?
in the charge of 是指“某人或某物由别人管理或照顾”，含被动意思。例如：
The hospital is in the charge of Dr Green . 这医院由格林医生负责。
I have placed the papers in the charge of my bank manager . 我把文件交给我的银行经理保管。
2 . remember to do / remember doing
remember to do 表示“记住要去做(某事)”，to do 发生在 remember 之后。例如：
Please remember to lock the door . 请别忘了锁门。
You must remember to write to us when you get there . 你到达那里时，记住给我们写信。
remember doing 表示“记得曾做了(某事)”，doing 发生在 remember 之前。例如：
I remember seeing you somewhere in Beijing . 我记得在北京什么地方见到过你。
He remembered putting the key in the box under his bed . 他记得把钥匙放在床底下的箱子里了。
动词-ing 的一般式 doing 也可换用完成式 having done。例如：
I remember having asked her to write to us . 我记得曾经要她给我们写信。
注意：remember doing = remember to have done。如：I remember meeting him a year ago . ( = I remember to have met him a year ago . )我记得一年前见过他。
Unit 3
1 . elder / older
elder 和 older 均为形容词 old 的比较级形式，但用法不同。elder 只用于人，多指兄弟姐妹之间年龄长幼中的“长”，只用作定语，不用作表语，不能同 than 连用。例如：
He is my elder by several years . 他大我几岁。
Their know ledge , customs and memories were handed down by the elders of the race . 他们的知识、风俗习惯以及他们所怀念的事情都是由他们种族的长辈传下来的。
older 可用于人或物，用于人时，指实际年龄大小中的“大”，用于物时，意为“较旧的”，既可作定语和表语，也可同 than 连用。例如：
He is older than I . 他的年龄比我大。
Our classroom building is older than yours . 我们的教学大楼比你们的旧。
2 . argue / quarrel
argue 意为“争论，争吵，辩论”，着重就自己的看法或立场提出论证，和大家辨论，其后可接名词性从句。例如：
Mary and Mike argued in a law court . 玛丽与迈克在法庭上辩论。
He argued that the oral English class could be conducted in another way . 他论证英语口语课可以采用另一种方法进行。
We heard them arguing in the other room . They were getting very angry . 我们听见他们在另一个房间争论，他们都很生气。
quarrel 意为“争吵，吵架”，它表示一种因不同意或不喜欢而产生的强烈争吵，既可指言辞上的不和，也可指激烈的争吵。例如：
They had even quarrelled several times . 他们甚至吵过好几次了。
It’s no use quarrelling about it with me . 为这事和我吵没有用。
Unit 4
1 . order / book
order 意为“订货”，“定购”，常用作及物动词，还可以解作“点菜(饭、酒、饮料等)”，既可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词。例如：
I ordered some new clothes a month ago . 一个月前我定做了几件新衣服。
What drink shall we order ? 咱们点什么酒呢 ?
Have you ordered yet ? 你点过菜了吗 ?
book 意为“预定(戏票、车票等)”(ask and pay for a seat for the theatre , a journey etc . )。例如：
You are to go to the hotel where rooms have already been booked for you . 你们去旅馆，房间已经给你们订好了。
The tickets are all booked . 票全部预定光了。
2 . in a / one word , in words , in word / with words , with the / these / words in a / one word 意为“总之”(=in short)。例如：
In a word , hunger is a big problem in the world today . 总之，饥饿是当世界的一大问题。
In one word , I don‘t trust him . 一句话，我不信任他。
in words 意为“用语言(来表达)”。例如：
You don’t know how wonderful it is . It can‘t be described in words .
你不知道那有多么美妙，简直无法用语言来描述。
in word 和 with words 都解作“在口头上”。例如：
We should not work for the people in word . 我们不应该仅在口头上为人民而工作。
He has acknowledged his faults with words . 他已在口头上承认错误了。
with the / these words 意为“这样说着”，“说完这话就……”( after saying these words)。例如：
With the words , he left the room . 说完这些话，他离开了房间。
3 . result in / result from
result in 意为“导致”，一般说来，主语表示原因，介词 in 的宾语表示结果。例如：
They would not vote to lose their land wealth , even if it resulted in a fairer society . 他们是不会投票赞成让出土地和财产的，即使这样做的结果能导致一个较为公平的社会。
His careless driving resulted in the accident . 他粗心的驾驶导致了那起事故。
result from 意为“由于……而引起”，与 result in 相对，一般说来主语是结果，介词 from 后面的宾语为原因。试比较：
Success results from hard work . 成功来自努力。
Hard work results in success . 努力终归会成功。
Unit 5
1 . gift / present
两者都可以表示“礼物”的意思，有时两者可以通用。如：birthday gift (或 present)“生日礼物”。gift 着重于诚意和份量，一般指上级或同级所赠的礼物，用于表示好感、友谊或尊敬。
篇15：书面表达训练：通知(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
--湖南省涟源市第二中学 曾 省 初
曾 省 初，男，毕业于湖南教育学院英语系, 任教于湖南省涟源市第二中学。自八七年以来一直从事高中毕业班和复习班的教学工作, ,英语教研组组长, 中学英语高级教师。《高考金刊》 、《学英语》、《中学英语之友》、《中学生英语报》、《中学英语指导》等多家杂志社特约编辑,曾在《中学英语之友》、《英语辅导报》、《数字世界报》、《 新高考》等报刊杂志上发表论文数十篇,主编了《2004最新英语听力教程》、《高考英语点晴》、《高中英语语法详解》、《高考英语热点与难点解析》、等15本。多年参加湖南省英语高考阅卷和高考英语口语主考工作,并被评为优秀阅卷教师。多次代表涟源市在娄底市高考英语学科研讨会上做示范讲座。坚持高三,复习班一线工作17年, 潜心于网络（个人网址www.k12.com.cn/teacher/union/personal/per_zj.php3?uid=Robert7616）与多媒体教学研究，能与外教自由交谈，教学效果显著。
[名师导航]
通知是一种常用应用文体，用来把有关事情告知特定的读者或听众。通知的正文就是通告的内容，这是主体部分，包括通告的对象、事由、时间、地点等。它分为书面通知和口头通知两种，这两种通知在格式上有较大差别。
书面通知的常见形式有一般通知、布告、海报等。它们一般张贴在布告栏或黑板上。通知的正文上方有Notice (或全部大写NOTICE)或Announcement (或全部大写ANNOUNCEMENT)为题目。以海报形式出现时，通知常以海报内容为题，如Lecture, Football Match等。当然题目中还可以出现发通知的单位，如Student Union Notice, English Department Announcement，通知题目要求居中打印、书写，有时为了强调，甚至可以以粗体形式出现。书面通知一定要有发通知时间及落款。出通知的时间一般写在通知正文的下方左角，落款于右下角，当然时间及落款也可都写右下角。书面通知的正文一般用第三人称来写。时间、地点、参加者、内容、注意事项是通知的要点，应直截了当地一一予以说明。我们既可以用包容量较大的长句，也可以用简明的短语，前者正式，后者易懂易记。在正文中切忌添枝加叶的评论。一般情况下通知以段落形式出现，海报则按信息分行居中书写或打印。
口头通知一般不用写题目，也不必有出通知的时间。发布口头通知首先说明被通知的对象，在正文前面有呼语且顶左格写，如：Ladies and gentlemen, Boys and girls 等等。为了引正听者的注意，需另起行不顶格写一些引人注意的话，如：Be quiet, please! May I have your attention? Attention, please! 等。口头通知要口头发布，因而可以用较随意口语体，如：I’ll, I’ve等。口头通知在结束时要有结束语，这是因为口头通知需要用一些语言表明通知的起止，如用That’s all. 表示通知到此为止宣布完毕。另外结尾处还需要一些如Thank you. 一样的客套语。口头通知的一些常用的开头语和结束语。
开头语
Be quiet, please! Attention, please!
Listen, please.
A Please be quiet, everyone.
Please stop talking over there!
May I have your attention, please!
Please be quiet, everyone, There is something I have to tell you.
B Be quiet, please. There is something you need to know.
Listen, please. There is going to be…
结束语
Any questions?
Does everyone understand?
That’s all. Thank you.
不论是口头通知还是书面通知都是宣布即将发生的事情及其具体内容，因而多用将来时态，其中往往有一些注意事项，一般用祈使句来强调。通知的语言要简洁明了，条理清晰，要求精确，特别是时间概念很重要，必须写得十分明确，不容丝毫含糊。
[高考真题演练]
]
1．[2000 春招]
为了丰富外国留学生的生活，你校学生会将举办一次音乐周活动，请你以组织者的身份写一个书面通知。有关内容如下：
时间：5月第1周
活动：
1．演唱歌曲：流行歌曲
2．器乐演奏：古典和民间音乐
3．音乐比赛：听歌曲片断,然后猜出处
地点：届时通知
参加者请于4月20日前报名。
注意：1．书面通知应写成一篇连贯的短文;
2．可以适当增减细节;
3．词数100左右;
4．通知格式已为你写好;
5．生词：古典 - classical 民间 - folk 乐器 - musical instruments
比赛 - contest
Possible version
April 10, 2000
Dear students,
The Students Union has decided to organise a music week. It will be held in the first week of May. The activities include singing pop songs and playing classical and folk music. Bring your own musical instruments, please. A music contest will be included, too. The students taking part in the contest will listen to part of a song or a piece of music, and then guess where it comes from. If you'd like to take part in the music week, please come and sign up for it before April 20th. The place for the activities will be announced later.
Come to the great fun!
Students Union
2．[书面表达1994]
提 示：你校学生会将为来访的美国朋友举办一个晚会，要在学校广播中宣布此事，并欢迎大家参加。为使美国朋友听懂，请你用英语写一篇广播通知。要点如下：
宗 旨：欢迎来访的美国朋友
组织者：学生会
时 间：8月15，星期六，晚7：30
地 点：主楼屋顶花园
活动内容：音乐、跳舞、唱歌、游戏、交换小礼品(请包装好、签名并在包装外面写上几个祝 愿词)
注意：
(1) 广播稿约100词；
(2) 应包括以上要点，但不要逐字翻译，要组织成一篇通顺连贯的短文；
(3) 开头语已为你写好。
生词：
交换礼品to exchange gifts 学生会 the Student Union
May I have your attention please?
I have an announcement to make--
内容要点：
(1) 为欢迎来访的美国朋友举办晚会；
(2) 由学生会组织；
(3)于8月15日，星期六，晚7：30举行；
(4) 在主楼屋顶花园；
(5) 将跳舞、唱歌、听音乐、做游戏；
(6) 交换小礼品，礼品需包装、签名并写上祝愿词；
(7) 欢迎大家都参加。
One possible version:
May I have your attention, please? I have an announcement to make. The Student Union is going to hold a party on Saturday evening, August 15, to welcome our friends from the United States. The party will be held in the roof garden of the Main Building. It will begin at 7:30 p. m. There will be music, dancing, singing, games and exchange of gifts. Will everybody please bring along a small gift for this purpose? Remember to wrap it up, sign your name and write a few words of good wishes.
Don’t forget: 7:30, Saturday evening, roof garden, Main Building. There’s sure to be a lot of fun. Everybody is welcome.
[创新训练]
1．会议通知
1．某中学将有一位美国教授布菜克博士来访，该教授将给师生们作一次报告，介绍美国的教育情况。学校要求同学们在星期三下午2：30准时到105大教室参加报告会，并带上笔记本，以便会后讨论。请你根据上面要点，用英语写一通知。(字数：80左右)
参考词语
美国教授American professor
有关教育的报告a report on education
作笔记to take notes
讨论to have a discussion
Notice
An American professor, Dr Black will visit our school this Wednesday afternoon. He will give us a report on the education in America. Everyone is supposed to be in Room 105, the big classroom exactly at 2:30 p.m. Wednesday. Please bring your notebooks with you and take notes while listening to the lecture, so that we can have a discussion about it after it is over.
2．郊游通知
[题 材]
假如你是高三(2)班班长，你班要在5月4日即下星期六去庐山郊游。请你拟一份通知，准备向同学们宣读。内容包括：
1、郊游日期：5月4日，下星期六；
2、主要内容：攀登比赛、摄影等；
3、早餐后8点坐校车出发，午餐自带，下午3点回校；
4、欢迎全体同学参加。凡参加者先登记并交给班长5元钱。
注意：通知词数约70-120。要求意思连贯。
[范 文]
An Outing to Lushan
An Announcement
Class, please be quiet. I am glad to tell you that we have decided to have an outing to Lushan next Saturday, May 4th. The expense is about five yuan. Those who wish to go should put down the names on this piece of paper and give the money to me. We will go by school bus which is to start after breakfast at 8:00 a. m. and come back to school at 3:00 p.m.. Remember to bring your lunch with you.
We’ll have a contest of climbing the hill and take photos there. All the students are welcome. That’s all. Thank you.
Monitor
Class 2 of Senior Grade 3
3．晚会通知
假如你是班长，通知你班同学本周星期六晚上7：30-在本班教室举行一次英语晚会，节目有唱歌、朗诵、讲故事、话剧等，要求本班同学都参加，欢迎外班同学光临，请同学们作好准备。(字数：80左右)
参考词语
朗诵recitation 节目programme (或program)欢迎to be welcomed表演 to perform
Fellow students, attention, please.I have some good news to tell you. We’re going to have an English evening, in our classroom at 7:30 on Saturday evening. The programme inclides songs, recitations, storytelling and short plays. Everyone in our clas must take part in it and students form other classed are also welcome. Everone who takes part in the party should perform once.
That’s all. Thank you.
4．游玩的通知
请你以学生会名义，根据下面表格的内容写一则去人民公园游玩的通知。
参加者 高二年级全体学生
活动内容 1．12月28日，周六去人民公园，上午浏览东湖；
2．中午在湖边野餐；
3．下午参观植物园（the botanical garden ）.
集合时间和地点 早上6：50在校门集合；7：00开车。
注意事项 1．穿运动鞋；
2．自带午餐和饮料；
3．如有可能，每班带1--2部照相机；
4．准时集合。
注意：1.词数100左右。2.通知的格式已写出。
Notice
Attention, please.
Notice
Attention, please .
The students of Senior Grade Two will go to the people’s Park for an outing on December 28,Saturday. In the morning ,we will visit the East Lake . We’ll have a picnic by the lake at noon .After that , we’ll visit the botanical garden .Please wear your sports shoes ,and take your lunch and drinks with you ,If possible ,each class can take a couple of cameras along so that you can take some pictures of the beautiful sights . We are to meet at the school gate at 6:50 a.m. The buses will start at 7:00 a.m. Don’t be late .
The Student’s Union
[创新训练]
5．假如有一批澳大利亚中学生在京旅游，住在北京饭店，请用英语为他们拟一个参观颐和园的口头通知, 内容要点如下:
参观时间: 五月二日 星期三
颐和园简介: 它是中国最大的保存最完好的皇家园林, 风景优美, 甚是迷人, 有山有水, 有皇家建筑和画廊。
活动安排: 上午自由参观, 中午在快餐馆吃午饭, 下午5:30返回宾馆。
集合时间: 星期三早上6:10, 汽车6:30开, 行驶45分钟。
集合地点: 宾馆大门口。
要求: 不要逐条翻译, 词数100词左右
One possible version:
May I have your attention?
We will visit the summer Palace on Wednesday, May 2nd. The Summer Palace is the largest well-kept royal park in China. In the park there is water and man-piled hills. There are some royal buildings and a gallery, too. I am sure you will be struck by its beautiful scenery. In the morning we will be free to visit the different places of the Palace and then we will have lunch in the fast-food restaurant. We will get back to the hotel at half five. Please gather at the hotel gate at 6:10 on Wednesday morning. The buses will start at 6:30. It will take us about 45 minutes to get there . Please be on time. Thank you.
6． 假如你是学校业余气象员，晚上6:00你根据从电台天气预报节目中得知的当地当天晚上和第二天上午的天气情况，用英语向全体师生作天气预报，并提出忠告。要点如下：
1．午夜至凌晨两点有强北风。
2．气温下降5-8°C。
3．明天上午有阵雨。
4．要求同学们今晚离开教室时关好门窗。
5．明天早晨起床时多穿些衣服，以防感冒。
(词数100左右)
Possible version：
Teachers and schoolmates,
It is six o'clock in the afternoon. I'm now giving the weather forecast as usual. From midnight to 2:00 tomorrow morning there will be strong north wind blowing across our town and the temperature will drop by 5--8℃. Also there will be showers tomorrow morning. Therefore, be sure to close all the doors and windows when you leave the classroom tonight and when you get up tomorrow morning, please put on more clothes in order to protect yourself from cold.
That' s all. Thank you.
7．通知全班同学，英语期中考试增加口试，内容包括：
1．朗读课本中的某些课文，部分自选，部分由教师在口试时指定；
2．围绕教师在口试时指定的课文，向教师提问；
3．口头英汉互译教师在口试时指定的课文；
4．就口试时教师指定的句型做替换练习，口试占期中考试15％，请大家做好准备。
参考词组：替换练习substitution drills 口头翻译oral translation
Possible version：
Boys and girls,
Attention, please. In order to improve your ability of speaking, an oral test will be added to the mid-term English examination. The test will include:
1. Reading aloud some of the texts, partly assigned by the teacher during the test and partly self-chosen.
2. Ask the questions about the texts assigned by the teacher during the test.
3. Oral translation of some of the texts from English into Chinese and from Chinese into English assigned by the teacher during the test.
4. Substitution drills of sentence patterns assigned by the teacher during the test. The oral test will be 15% of the marks of the mid-term examination. Please get ready for it.
8．某机场因浓雾，飞机不能起降。请你用英语拟一广播通知。内容包括：
1．原因：浓雾。
2．措施：各航班推迟起飞，滞留乘客免费午餐。
用餐时间：11：00-13：00；地点：二楼餐厅。
雾散即宣布起飞，1小时内无飞机降落机场。 ，
3．要求：遵守秩序，保管好自己的行李，不要离开候机厅。
注意：1．通知应包括上述全部内容；2．词数100左右。
Possible version：
Ladies and gentlemen,
May I have your attention, please?
All flights this morning are put off because of the thick fog. As there is no wind, the weatherman is unable to tell when the fog will clear up. We cannot but wait. Please keep order and take good care of your baggage, and don't leave the waiting room.
For passengers retained at the airport, lunch is free. It will be served in the dining hall on the second floor from eleven o'clock to thirteen o'clock.
By the way, no planes will arrive in an hour.
As soon as the weather turns favourable, we shall announce flights.
Thank you.
9． 你是班长，根据下面提示，拟一个英语口头通知。
1)加拿大学生来校参观；
2)共24人，从5月25日上午8:00到下午5:00；
3)5月25日上午7:50在会议室集合，欢迎来自加拿大的学生并开联欢会，现在要准备好节目；4)带客人参观学校，12:00在校食堂就餐；5)下午听加拿大学生介绍他们学校的情况 6)注意待人要热情，礼貌。
Possible version:
Attention, please, everyone! 24 students from Canada will come to visit our school on May 25. They will arrive at 8:00 in the morning. We are to gather at 7:50 in the meeting room to give them a warm welcome, and then we'll hold a get-together. Please get our programmes. After that, we'll show them around our school. And we'll have lunch together in the school dining hall. In the afternoon some Canadian students will talk to us about their school. They will leave at 5:00 p.m.. We should be polite and friendly to our guests.
That's all. Thank you.
